Grand Caravan 2010

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number .............. 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision nicians and genuine Mopar parts, and cares about your
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all satisfaction.
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet, Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
documents. Please take the time to read these publica- illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
tions carefully. Following the instructions and recom- The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
mendations in this manual will help assure safe and contains a complete listing of all subjects.
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the following table for a description of the
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain this Owner’s Manual:
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.

INTRODUCTION 5

6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the Auto-
mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window Vehicle Identification Number
on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title. NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
1
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 2
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 27

▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 16 ▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 31
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
䡵 Illuminated Entry System — If Equipped . . . . . . 18 ▫ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . 35
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 19 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
▫ Using The RKE Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Sliding Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 ▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 63
▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped . . . . . 40 ▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
▫ Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock . . . . . 44 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
䡵 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
▫ Airbag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
▫ Advanced Front Airbag Features . . . . . . . . . . 65
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 70
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) Mode — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 ▫ Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped . . 78
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped . . . . . . 58 ▫ Integrated Child Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . 81
▫ Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Restraints (AHR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
䡵 Rear Seat Delete Feature 䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
(Commercial Vehicles Only) — If Equipped . . . . . 91
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
▫ Restraining Infants And Small Children
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 2
With Seat Delete Feature
(Commercial Vehicles Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 94
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to
an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three
with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent
positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
1 — LOCK
released from the START position, the switch automati- 2 — ACCESSORY
cally returns to the ON position. 3 — ON
4 — START

Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. It also contains
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an
emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob. 2
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the lower
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key from the Key Fob, slide the
mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other Emergency Key Removal
hand. NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinder with either side up.
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
LOCK position and then remove the Key Fob.

NOTE: Power window switches will also remain active Key-In-Ignition Reminder
for up to 90 seconds after the ignition switch has been Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
turned to LOCK, depending upon the accessory delay ignition and the ignition switch position is LOCK or
setting. Opening the front door will cancel this feature. ACC, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
WARNING!
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving when the Key Fob is placed in the LOCK or ACC ignition
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a position.
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key Fob in SENTRY KEY姞
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unautho-
other controls, or move the vehicle rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
CAUTION! or unlocked.
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote
remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the

vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The NOTE: The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems.
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection. 2
After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
Replacement Keys
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
engine being shut off after two seconds. vehicle. Once an Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
CAUTION!
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
possible by an authorized dealer. lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided General Information
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. subject to the following conditions:
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fobs to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key • This device must accept any interference that may be
Fob is one that has never been programmed. received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
the authorized dealer. The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
Customer Key Programming for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
Programming of Key Fobs may be performed at an thorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
authorized dealer. Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visible
signals. For the first three minutes, the headlights, park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security
Light will flash repeatedly and the horn will sound. For
an additional 15 minutes, only the headlights, park lamps
and/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.

The engine will run only if a valid key is used to start the about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set.
vehicle. After the alarm is set, the Vehicle Security Light will flash
at a slower rate to indicate that the Vehicle Security
Rearming Of The System
Alarm is armed. 2
The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15
additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security NOTE: If the Vehicle Security Light stays on continu-
Light flashing, if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been ously during vehicle operation, have the system checked
disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still by your authorized dealer.
present, the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that
Disarm The System
condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
Arming The System or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch.
Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
NOTE:
a power door lock switch while the driver or passenger
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
door is open, or press the LOCK button on the Remote
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After all the doors are
Vehicle Security Alarm.
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. The Vehicle Security liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will not
Light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for

disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters Tamper Alert
the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
alarm will sound. your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
unlock the doors and the Vehicle Security Light will flash
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
for 30 seconds. Check the vehicle for tampering.
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open the
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, doors. This feature is only available if you have RKE.
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will switch is turned ON.
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

NOTE: RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the
• The front courtesy overhead console and liftgate lights vehicle to activate the system.
do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the interior
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
lights ON position (extreme top position). 2
the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE
• The Illuminated Entry System will not operate if the transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining RKE
dimmer control is in the extreme downward position. transmitters will continue to work. Driving at speeds
5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables all RKE transmitter
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF buttons for all RKE transmitters.
EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle.
liftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power Vehicles built without the powered options will be
liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding equipped from the factory with three-button RKE trans-
door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) mitters, and those built with power options will be
using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The equipped with up to seven-button RKE transmitters.

Using the RKE Transmitter (optional), power sliding doors, Remote Start feature
Three-button RKE transmitters will provide basic UN- (optional). Some features can be programmed to the
LOCK, LOCK and PANIC functions. customers preferences. For example, flash headlights or
sound horn on LOCK.
Key Fob With Three-Button RKE Transmitter

Seven-button RKE transmitters will provide functions Key Fob With Seven-Button RKE Transmitter
that allow the same basic operation as the three-button,
but may also be used to operate the power liftgate

Remote Unlock Doors and Liftgate • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform-
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s side or twice to ing the following steps:
unlock all doors and liftgate. The Illuminated Entry 2
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
system also turns on.
vehicle.
Remote Key Unlock on First Press
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
the driver’s side, or all doors, on the first press of the
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
while still holding the LOCK button.
• For vehicles equipped with an “Electronic Vehicle
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
Information Center (EVIC),” refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-Pro- 4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
grammable Features)” in Section 4. ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
Key Fob removed.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- Sound Horn with Remote Lock
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle proceed as follows:
Security Alarm.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Sound
Remote Lock Doors and Liftgate Horn with Lock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The horn will chirp once Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
to acknowledge the signal.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
Express Down Window Feature following steps:
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
vehicle.
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button 2. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 sec-
lower completely. onds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding
the LOCK button.

3. Release both buttons at the same time. headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
ignition switch in the LOCK position and the Key Fob you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second 2
removed. time, or you turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing
its previous setting. the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF)
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
noises of the system.
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the Press the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security within five seconds to Open/Close the Power Liftgate.
Alarm. The liftgate will beep for three seconds and then open/
close. If the button is pushed while the liftgate is being
Using the Panic Alarm
power closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
position.
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the

If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a Power Open/Close Right Power Sliding Door — If
powered liftgate, pressing the LIFTGATE button twice Equipped
will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 sec- Press the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
onds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area. RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
Close the Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead
power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
console.
position.
If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear
Turn Off Flash Lights with RKE Lock — If
pillar, pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only.
Equipped
The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
Power Open/Close Left Power Sliding Door — If the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
Equipped ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
Press the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on the the current setting, proceed as follows:
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Flash
Close the Left Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
Light With Lock,” under Personal Settings (Customer-
RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle
power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
position.

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
following steps: ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the 2
vehicle.
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed Alarm.
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
The following table explains the Lamp Flash options.
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
still holding the UNLOCK button. Which Turn Number of
Function
Signal Lamps Flashes
3. Release both buttons at the same time. Lock All 1
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- Unlock 1st Press Left Side 2
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter Unlock All Doors All 2
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the Left Side Left Side 2
Key Fob removed. Right Side Right Side 2
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to Liftgate All 2
its previous setting. Programming Additional Transmitters
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.

Replacing the Transmitter Battery General Information
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
battery. RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. • This device may not cause harmful interference.
See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
• This device must accept any interference received,
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back including interference that may cause undesired
housing or the printed circuit board. operation.
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
flat blade to pry the battery door and transmitter housing distance, check for these two conditions.
apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the life of the battery is approximately three years.
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the battery
door and transmitter housing together.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still • Battery at an acceptable charge level 2
maintaining security. The system has a range of
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
approximately 328 ft (100 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto- WARNING!
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
How to Use Remote Start confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
All of the following conditions must be met before the oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
engine will Remote Start: bon monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Shift lever in PARK
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
• Doors closed away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
• Hood closed System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off

To Enter Remote Start Mode To Enter the Vehicle After Remote Start
Press and release the REMOTE START button To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec- Remote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking lights UNLOCK button on the transmitter. After the vehicle is
will flash and horn will chirp twice (if pro- unlocked, you can enter the vehicle, insert the Key Fob
grammed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will into the ignition switch and move it to the ON position,
remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle. otherwise the engine will shut off at the end of 15- minute
NOTE: cycle.
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
will automatically lock the doors. Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
• The park lights will turn on and remain on during the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
Remote Start mode. the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the
in the Remote Start mode. switch to the ON position.
• The engine can be started two consecutive 15-minute NOTE:
cycles with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition • The ignition switch must be in the ON position in
switch must be turned to the ON position before you order to drive the vehicle.
can repeat the start sequence.

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/ Mode
Turn to ON” will flash in the EVIC until you insert the Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
Key Fob. Once inserted, the message “Turn to ON” allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. 2
will flash in the EVIC until you turn the Key Fob to
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in the
ON.
Remote Start Mode, the system will not allow the Remote
Cancel Remote Start Start button to shutdown the engine for two seconds after
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following receiving a valid Remote Start request.
occur:
When to Reset Remote Start
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
• Any engine warning lights come on failed start, where the Remote Starting sequence was
• The hood is opened initiated but the engine stopped cranking without start-
ing. After either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle
• The hazard switch is pressed Security Alarm system is alarming, or if the PANIC
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK button was pressed, the vehicle must be reset by inserting
a valid Key Fob into the ignition switch and rotating the
• The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15-minute Key Fob to the ON position, and then rotating the Key
cycle Fob back to the LOCK/OFF position.

DOOR LOCKS If the lock plunger is down when you shut the door, the
door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the
Manual Door Locks
vehicle before closing the door.
Lock the doors by pushing down on the lock plungers on
each door trim panel.
Sliding Door Lock

Manual Door Lock

WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as 2
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition switch, and lock your vehicle.
Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per-
sonal injuries and death.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped Driver Power Door Lock Switches

A power door lock switch is on each front door trim 1 - Unlock 2 - Lock
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. If you press the power door lock switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing
the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to

operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding
ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to door is open, the sliding door will lock.
remove the Key Fob.
Lock Doors Automatically — If Equipped
If the Lock Doors Automatically feature is enabled, the
door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s
speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
The Lock Doors Automatically feature is enabled when
your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can
be disabled by using the following procedure:
• On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to ⬙Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)⬙ in the
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),” in
Section 4 of this manual.
Front Passenger Power Door Switches
1 - Window Open/Close 3 - Doors Unlock • On vehicles not equipped with the optional EVIC
2 - Doors Lock perform the following steps:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.

2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will The Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this feature can be reactivated by repeating the above men-
programming procedure.) tioned procedure or by performing the procedure in the
EVIC (if equipped), Personal Settings (Customer-Pro- 2
3. Place the Key Fob into the ignition.
grammable Features) section.
4. Within 15-seconds, cycle the ignition Key Fob from the
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit —
LOCK position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of
If Equipped
five times, ending in the ON position (do not start the
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
engine).
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch will occur only after the shift lever has been shifted into
in the LOCK direction. the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (the
shift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doors
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
closed).
been disabled.
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
operate if there is any manual operation of the power
8. If a chime is not heard, the program mode was door locks (lock or unlock).
canceled before the feature could be disabled. If neces-
• On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic
sary, repeat the previous procedure.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to ⬙Personal

Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)⬙ in the 6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),” in been changed.
Section 4 of this manual.
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
• On vehicles not equipped with the optional EVIC
8. If a chime is not heard, the program mode was
perform the following steps:
canceled before the feature could be changed. If neces-
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors. sary, repeat the previous procedure.
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature can be
cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this reactivated by repeating the above mentioned procedure
programming procedure.) or by performing the procedure in the EVIC, Customer-
Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped.
3. Insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch.
NOTE: Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph
4. Within 15-seconds, cycle the ignition Key Fob from the
(24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit
LOCK position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of
features in accordance with local laws.
five times ending in the ON position (do not start the
engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the UNLOCK direction.

WINDOWS Power Windows
You can control either the front or rear windows using
Power Vent Windows — If Equipped
switches located on the driver’s door trim panel. The
Switches on the driver’s door trim panel let the driver
switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in 2
operate the two vent windows from the driver’s seat.
the ON or ACC position and during power accessory delay.
Power Vent Window Switches Driver’s Power Window Switches

1 – Open 2 – Close 1 – Left Rear 3 – Left Front
2 – Right Rear 4 – Right Front

NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to LOCK, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
The driver may lock out all power windows by depress-
ing the bar switch just below the power window switches.
Power Window Lockout Switch

Front Passenger Power Window Switch
There is a single switch on the front passenger’s door
trim panel which operates the passenger door window
and locks and unlocks all doors. The switch will operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC
position and during power accessory delay.

The switches will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON or ACC position and during power acces-
sory delay.
2
Front Passenger Power Window Switches

1 - Window Open/Close 3 - Doors Unlock
2 - Doors Lock
Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch — If Sliding Door Power Window Switch
Equipped NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,
Second row passengers may power the sliding door stopping several inches above the window sill.
window by a single switch on the door handle assembly.

Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped To stop the window from going all the way up during the
The front window switches may be equipped with an Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch past the
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
detent, release, and the window will go down automati-
the first detent and release when you want the window to
cally.
stop.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
NOTE:
part way and release it when you want the window to
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
stop.
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
The power window switches remain active for up to down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
10 minutes (depending on the accessory delay setting) switch again to close the window.
after the ignition switch has been turned to LOCK.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
Auto Up Feature With Anti–Pinch Protection — If closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
Equipped first detent and hold to close window manually.
The front Driver switch may be equipped with an Auto
Up feature. Lift the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go up automatically.

Wind Buffeting
WARNING!
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the 2
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
the window path before closing. open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
Auto Up Reset — If Equipped the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
steps after vehicle power is restored: with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.

SLIDING SIDE DOOR door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
outside. Pull outward on exterior handle to open the outside handle.
sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle back-
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the
hold open latch in order to close the door. NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol-
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
lowing guidelines:
fuel door.
• Always open the door smoothly.
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
• Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open- The power sliding door may be opened or closed manu-
ing the door. This is very important when your vehicle ally or by using the buttons on the RKE transmitter,
is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in overhead console switch, or rear door switch. Pulling the
the downhill direction. inside or outside power sliding door handle will also
power open or close the power sliding door.
• There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding

NOTE: Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a
second time while the sliding door is power opening or
power closing will allow the sliding door to be opened or
closed manually. 2
Press the button on the RKE transmitter twice within five
seconds to open a power sliding door. When the door is
fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds
a second time will close the door.
There are power sliding side door switches located on the
trim panel just in front of the power sliding door for the
rear seat passengers and in the overhead console for the
driver and passengers. Pressing the switch once will Power Sliding Door
open the power sliding door. When the door is fully open 1 — Heated Seat 4 — Door Handle
pressing the switch a second time will close the door. 2 — Power Window 5 — Power Sliding Door
3 — Manual Lock
NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlocked
If the inside or outside door handles are used while the
before the power sliding door switches will operate.
power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding
door feature will be canceled.

To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding • If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc-
doors from the rear seats, press the power sliding door tions within the same cycle, the system will automati-
master lock button, located in the overhead console, to cally stop and must be opened or closed manually.
disable the switches and handles for the rear seat passen-
gers. WARNING!
NOTE: You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path
• The power sliding side door switches will not open if of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear
the shift lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above before closing the door.
0 mph (0 km/h). To close the power sliding door with
the shift lever in gear and vehicle speed at 0 mph Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash
(0 km/h), the brake must be pressed The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door 12 seconds when either sliding door is opened. This will
while it is closing or opening, the door will automati- alert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be
cally reverse to the closed or open position, provided entering or exiting the vehicle.
it meets sufficient resistance.
The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or
• If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or disabled by performing the following procedure:
close position, it will fully open when a power sliding
door switch is pressed. To close the door, wait until it 1. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch.
is fully open and then press the switch again.

2. Cycle the ignition switch ON/LOCK five times ending opened or closed by pressing the switch located on the
in the ON position (do not start the engine). trim panel just in front of the sliding door or activating
the inside power sliding door handle.
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the HAZ-
ARD switch. 2
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the
previous procedure.
Power Sliding Side Door Master Lock Switch
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the second row sliding door switches
and handles may be overridden by pressing the ON side
of the Master Lock Out Switch located in the front
overhead console. Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Master Switch
1 — Left Door 3 — Right Door
When the power sliding door master lock switch is in the 2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lock
ON position, the power sliding side door may not be

Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
Child Protection Door Lock system.
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward Child Protection Door Lock
(toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
Lock.

NOTE:
WARNING!
• After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, al-
ways test the door from the inside to make certain it is Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
in the desired position. Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened 2
from the outside door handle or the switches located
• When the Child Protection Door Lock system is en-
on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding
gaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
door when the Child Protection Door Locks are
position) the door can be opened only by using the
engaged.
outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches
on the overhead console or the switches located on the
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
trim panel just in front of the power sliding door.
1. Open the sliding side door.
• The power sliding side door will operate from the
switches located on the trim panel just in front of the 2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward
power sliding door, regardless of the Child Protection (away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Protection
Door Lock lever position. To avoid unintentional Door Lock.
operation of the power sliding door from the rear
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if
seats, press the ”ON” Master Lock Out Switch lo-
equipped).
cated in the front overhead console, next to the
driver.

NOTE: To open the liftgate, depress the liftgate release handle
• After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system, located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull
always test the door from the inside to make certain it the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
is in the desired position.
• The power sliding side door switches will not open the
power sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or the
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
• The power sliding door will operate from the outside
door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on the
overhead console, or the switches located on the trim
panel just in front of the power sliding door when the
shift lever is in PARK, regardless of the child lock lever
position.
LIFTGATE Liftgate Handle Location

On vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate can
be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter button, or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors.

If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with the
power liftgate feature, pressing the button on the RKE
transmitter will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked
for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the 2
liftgate area.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter. Press the button on the transmitter twice within five
seconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate is
fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds,
a second time, will close the liftgate. Overhead Console Master Power Switch
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by 1 — Left Door 3 — Right Door
pressing the button located on the overhead console. 2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lock

The power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button, When the RKE transmitter button is pressed and the
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening. Flash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flash to
Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This button signal that the liftgate is opening or closing.
cannot be used to open the liftgate.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
Rear Power Liftgate Switch

• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the (62°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open liftgate buttons.
position. 2
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
• The power liftgate must be in the full open or close within the same cycle, the system will automatically
positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the stop and must be opened or closed manually.
liftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it must
be opened or closed manually. WARNING!
• If the liftgate release button is activated while the • Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
full open position. passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift
vehicle.
lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h). • If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
below ⫺12°F (⫺24°C) or temperatures above 143°F DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. • Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera- that span the front, second, and third row seating for
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when the driver and passengers seated next to a window —
opening the liftgate in cold weather. if equipped
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS • Supplemental Side Seat Airbags — if equipped

Some of the most important safety features in your • An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
vehicle are the restraint systems: wheel
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating • Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
positions
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
• Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen- occupant protection by managing occupant energy
ger during an impact event — if equipped
• Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
(AHR) located on top of the front seats (integrated into seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
the head restraint) for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems.

NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different far away from home or on your own street.
rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
Please pay close attention to the information in this can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some 2
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
possible. ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
WARNING! be belted at all times.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer Lap/Shoulder Belts
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled All seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other belts.
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
The belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lock
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature
buckled up properly.
allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
the vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
ously injured or killed. of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat sengers safe, too.
belts. • Two people should never be belted into a single
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
using a seat belt properly. another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
than one person, no matter what their size.
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
(Continued)
adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the
WARNING!
front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. Grasp
the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate • A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of 2
around your lap. the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
WARNING!
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
WARNING!
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be 2
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision. at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision,
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
Removing Slack from Belt
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.

Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
WARNING!
comfortable and not resting on your neck. When the belt
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and is long enough to fit, insert the large latch plate into the
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system buckle until you hear a “click.” The retractor should
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. withdraw any slack in the belt.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
To release the small latch plate, position the end of the
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
large latch plate against the red button on the small latch
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
plate and push upward. Reinstall the latch plates into the
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
headliner.
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
Third Row Center Shoulder Belt Instructions In the front seats and the second row outboard seats, the
The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or
in the headliner slightly behind the third row seat. downward to help position the belt away from your
neck. The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by
Pull the strap down and secure the small latch plate of
pushing anywhere on the anchorage. To move the an-
the lap belt into the small buckle until you hear a “click”.
chorage downward, squeeze the actuation buttons while
simultaneously pushing down on the anchorage assem-
bly.

Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in 2
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
seat is installed in a passenger seating position. Children
12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up
Adjustable Anchorage in the rear seat.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
it is locked in position. the entire belt is extracted.

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
now in the Automatic Locking Mode. worn snugly and positioned properly.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic ers are single use items. After a collision deploys the
Locking Mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive (Emer- airbags and/or pretensioners, a deployed airbag and/or
gency) Locking mode. pretensioner must be replaced immediately.
Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints
The seat belts for both front seating positions are (AHR)
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. nents, and vehicles with this equipment can not be
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt readily identified by any markings, only through visual
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam
including those in child restraints. and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.

How the Active Head Restraints (AHR) work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity or type of rear impact require the
Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. In case of AHR 2
deployment both driver and passenger seat AHR’s will
be deployed.
When AHR’s deploy during a rear impact, the head
restraint front half extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the head and the AHR. This system
is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries the driver and front passenger in certain types of
rear end impacts. Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may 1 — Head Restraint Front Half 3 — Head Restraint Back Half
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact. (Decorative Plastic Rear
(Soft Foam and Trim) Cover)
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear 4 — Head Restraint Guide
2 — Seatback
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever- Tubes
ity and type of the impact.

1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an
accident.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and

positioning the head restraint, refer to Section 3 “Adjust-
ing Active Head Restraints”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident,
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they a comfortable position.
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the 3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
resetting procedure). vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.

Down And Rearward Reset Movement Down Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism

4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
into the back decorative plastic half. checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the occupied driver’s seat belt has not been buckled
within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will
alert the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should
also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Once the warning is triggered, BeltAlert威 will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 sec-
onds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled.
AHR In Reset Position BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
NOTE: unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the head speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
restraints, see an authorized dealer.

BeltAlert威 Programming NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized on while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat
dealer or by following these steps: belt.
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first 4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A 2
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
or START position. Chrysler Group LLC does not recom- fully completed the programming.
mend deactivating BeltAlert威.
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
1. With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
belt.
while the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled or
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not retracted.
start the engine), and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
Light to turn off.
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
ON/RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the the best way to keep the baby safe.
driver’s seat belt at least three times within 60 seconds,
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
ending with the seat belt buckled.
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.

Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
the force if there is a collision. passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
Seat Belt Extender
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
the airbag covers.
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex- regulations for Advanced Airbags.
tender and stow it.
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
WARNING!
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can in-
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
crease the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the
the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and
snug, and in the recommended seating positions. Re-
move and store the extender when not needed.

driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a win- • Steering Wheel and Column
dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, they
• Instrument Panel
are located above the side windows and their covers are
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG. • Knee Impact Bolster 2
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners — if equipped
trim; but they will open during airbag deployment.
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
Airbag System Components — if equipped
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Supplemental Side Seat Airbags — if equipped
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Advanced Front Airbag Features
• Airbag Warning Light The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
• Driver Front Airbag
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
• Front Passenger Airbag determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the impact sensors
• Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraint for
at the front of the car.
Driver and Front Passenger
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of

the second stage determines whether the output force is Supplemental Seat Side Airbags — If Equipped
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet Supplemental seat side airbags provide enhanced protec-
the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended. tion and work together with supplemental Side Airbag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to help protect an occupant
WARNING! during a side impact. The supplemental seat side airbag
is marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag
side of the seat.
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-
ing.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat Side Airbag Label

When the bag deploys, it opens the seam between the • Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each bag deploys but they will open during airbag deployment.
independently, that is a left side impact deploys the left
The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and
bag only and a right-side impact deploys only the right 2
rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the
bag.
SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu-
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain pant protection.
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC airbags offer side-impact and vehicle rollover WARNING!
protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side
addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack
airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
luggage or other cargo up high enough to block
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
the location of the SABIC. The area where the side
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down-
curtain airbag is located should remain free from
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
any obstructions.
NOTE: • Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners between you and the side airbags; the performance
and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle could be adversely affected and/or objects could
may deploy. be pushed into you, causing serious injury.

Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
WARNING!
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection. ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
front airbag. An airbag deployment can cause severe
Knee Impact Bolsters
injury or death to infants in that position.
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
the best interaction with the Advanced Front airbag.
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
risk of harm from a deploying airbag: positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
Children 12 years old and younger should always ride
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
buckled up in a rear seat.
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section.)

You should read the instructions provided with your
WARNING!
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul-
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work 2
der belts properly.
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Always wear your seat belts even though you have
Airbags room to inflate. airbags.
Do not lean against the door. If your vehicle has side • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags will panel during front airbag deployment could cause
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the serious injury, including death. Airbags need
door. room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or instru-
If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified ment panel.
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer • Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need against the door. Sit upright in the center of the
Assistance⬙ in Section 9 of this manual. seat.

Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
required for this vehicle.
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required. little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic initial deceleration.
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC air-
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
bags — if equipped, Supplemental Side Seat Airbags — if
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners — if
of collision.
equipped, as required, depending on severity and type of
impact. Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi-
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
deployed.
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not ex- Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
collisions. away from an inflating airbag.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
or ON position. If the key is in the LOCK position, in the noted. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not malfunction. 2
on and will not inflate.
WARNING!
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
mately four to six seconds for a self-check
away.
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
comes on again after initial startup.
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate

the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag inflation The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
rates are possible, based on the collision type and sever- airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of
ity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper collision.
right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
of the way as the bags inflate to their full size. The bags
the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START
fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about
or ON positions. These include all of the items previously
half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The bags then
mentioned.
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger. Based on the severity and type of collision, the side
airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front
inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the
airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of
space between the occupant and the door. The side
the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with
airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side
your control of the vehicle.
airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high
Supplemental Seat Side Airbag Inflator Units — If force, that it could injure you if you are not seated
Equipped properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
The Side Impact (SRS) Seat-Mounted Side Airbags are side airbag inflates. This especially applies to children.
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.

Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
During collisions where the impact is confined to a whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may 2
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABIC
deploy the SABIC Airbags, depending on severity and
airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the
SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle. Front and Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors aid the ORC in
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
determining appropriate response to impact events. Ad-
curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes
ditional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
deployment and provide verification.
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms
(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your Enhanced Accident Response System
eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area the communication network remains intact, and the
where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about event the ORC will determine whether to have the
3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated. Enhanced Accident Response System to perform the
following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
until the ignition key is turned off. abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
removed.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
• Unlock the doors automatically. few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
If a Deployment Occurs
The airbags are designed to deflate immediately after • As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
deployment. particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
the airbag system.
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
or all of the following may occur: continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
structions for cleaning.
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front

Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de- Maintaining Your Airbag System
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
airbags will not be in place to protect you. WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system 2
WARNING!
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags, protect you. Do not modify the components or
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well. modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)

Airbag Warning Light
WARNING! (Continued)
You will want to have the airbags ready to
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad- inflate for your protection in a collision. While
vanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
accidentally or may not function properly if modi- nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
fications are made. Take your vehicle to an autho- an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser-
vice. If your seat, including your trim cover and • The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (includ- approximately four to six seconds when the ignition
ing removal or loosening/tightening of seat attach- switch is first turned ON.
ment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized • The light remains on after the approximate four to
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso- six-second interval.
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify an
advanced airbag system for persons with disabili- • The light comes on and remains on while driving.
ties, contact your authorized dealer. NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label

located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the 2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
fuse is good.
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
Event Data Recorder (EDR) plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be 2
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param- about the possible causes of crashes and associated
eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
applicable), and up to a quarter second of either high- Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be re-
speed deceleration data or change in velocity during quested by customers, insurance carriers, government
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment. officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or associated with universities, and with hospital and insur-
nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable. ance organizations.
NOTE: In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the com-
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica- pany or its designated representative will first obtain
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the
deployment. vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before

accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to 3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., 4. Otherwise required by law.
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General Data parameters that are recorded:
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. govern- airbag system
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive • Vehicle speed
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve- • Engine RPM
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
• Brake switch status
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any • Pedal position
third party except when: • And other parameters depending on vehicle
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data configuration
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database, Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter The Integrated Child Booster Seat (if equipped) is located in
preserved. each second-row passenger seat. The booster seat is de-
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler signed for children weighing between 48 and 85 lbs (22 and
Group LLC product. 39 kg) and between 47 in (119 cm) and 57 in (145 cm) tall.

The booster seat is designed to raise the child high To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat
enough to use the vehicle lap and shoulder belt. The follow these steps:
booster seat latch release handle is located at the front of
1. Pull the release handle forward to release the latch and
the seat cushion. 2
seat cushion. Then, lift seat cushion up and push back to
lock it in the booster seat position.
Booster Seat Release Handle

Booster Seat Position

NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on
WARNING!
the hips and as snug as possible.
Failure to comply with the following conditions
5. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insert
could result in serious injury of death:
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
• The swivel seat should be locked in the forward-
facing position when using the booster seat with 6. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward on
the vehicle in motion. the shoulder portion of the seat belt.
• Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely
into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat cushion could cause serious injury.
2. Place the child upright in the seat with their back

firmly against the seatback.
3. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
4. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary
to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s lap.
Integrated Child Booster Seat

7. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the To obtain Integrated Child Seat replacement instruc-
buckle. tions: Refer to Publication Order Forms in Section 9 and
Integrated Child Seat — If Equipped specify publication number 81–016–8050 when ordering.
Operating instructions for the second row bench seat with Child Restraints 2
Integrated Child Seat are included with the seat. If the Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
instructions are not with the seat or in the Owner’s Manual time, including babies and children. Every state in the
Package, replacement instruction can be obtained. United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
Second Row Bench Seat With Integrated Child Seat

• Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
WARNING!
facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types of child
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers
required to hold even an infant on your lap could and convertible child seats. Both types of child re-
become so great that you could not hold the child, no straints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt
matter how strong you are. The child and others or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s later in this section.
size.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
Infants and Small Children
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
children from newborn size to the child almost large
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
child.
less than one year old.

Older Children and Child Restraints
WARNING!
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child 2
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
injury or death to infants in this position. who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
• Rearward-facing child seats and infant carriers must vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
NEVER be used while the second row Swivel ’n Go restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and
seats are in the rearward-facing position. Tether for CHildren (LATCH)” later in this section.
An aftermarket belt-positioning booster seat is for chil-
WARNING!
dren weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still
Never place any child seat, booster seat, or infant too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belts. If the
carrier in the Swivel ’n Go seat while it is in the child can not sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat
rearward-facing position. The swivel seat should be cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback,
locked in the forward position when using any child they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child
seat, booster seat, or infant carriers, with the vehicle and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
in motion. Failure to do so could result in serious shoulder belt.
injury or even death.

Children Too Large for Booster Seats NOTE: For additional information, refer to
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
over the front of the seat when their back is against the site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat. roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
WARNING!
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
as possible.
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or collision. The child could be badly injured or
slouching can move the belt out of position. killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If this doesn’t • A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
help, move the child to the center rear seating position used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
and use the lap belt. Never allow a child to put the straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
(Continued)

• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
• Occupants riding in Swivel ’n Go seating must be not work when you need it.
wearing their seat belt and the seat must be locked
in either the forward or rearward position. Failure • The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching 2
to do so could result in serious injury or even latch plates, which are designed to keep the lap portion
death. tight around the child restraint so that it is not neces-
sary to use a locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt.
restraint: The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight; how-
ever, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure • In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
where you will use it, before you buy it. buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
weight and height limits. into the buckle with the release button facing out.

• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and connector, and a means for adjusting the tension in the
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,tension in the strap. Not all child restraint systems will be
try a different seating position. installed as described here. Again, carefully follow the
installation instructions that are provided with the child
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint system.
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
cause serious personal injury.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
Installing the Child Restraint System
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
tions that come with the child restraint system.
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or

NOTE:
WARNING!
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
Improper installation of a child restraint to the child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out 2
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or of reach of children. It is recommended that before
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
when installing an infant or child restraint. seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
System behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
Each vehicle, except commercial cargo vehicles, is the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
equipped with the child restraint anchorage system should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
Tether for CHildren. Two LATCH child restraint anchor- that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
age systems are installed on all second-row seats and in played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the center position on all third row fold-in-floor seats. the vehicle.
Second-row seats also feature tether strap anchorages,
located in the rear surface of the seatback. In addition, all • If your child restraint seat is not LATCH-compatible,
third row fold-in-floor seats are equipped with a child install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
restraint tether anchor at the center seating position.

Installing the Lower Attachments: 4. Tighten the lower attachment strap while firmly push-
ing the child restraint rearward and downward into the
1. The vehicle lower anchorages are round bars located
vehicle seat. Remove all slack in the lower attachment
at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback.
straps. Reference the child restraint instructions for infor-
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower child restraint mation on properly removing slack.
attachment straps (reference the child restraint seat in-
structions) to ease the installation.
NOTE: It is recommended to loosen the top tether strap
and route it loosely prior to securing the lower anchors so
the top tether strap is not trapped between the vehicle
seat and child restraint.
3. Attach the lower child restraint attachment straps to
the vehicle’s lower anchor bars. Ensure that the lower
attachment strap is firmly engaged and that the hook is
secure.
LATCH Anchorages

Installing the Top Tether Strap
(with either Lower Anchors or Vehicle Seat Belt):
1. Route the top tether strap under the adjustable head
restraint between the steel posts. 2
2. Provide enough slack (reference child restraint in-
structions) for the tether strap to reach the tether anchor
located near the bottom of the seat back.
3. Clip tether hook to tether anchor. Ensure that the hook
is firmly engaged and secure.
4. Remove all slack and tighten tether strap according to
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
NOTE: The top tether strap is always to be secured,

regardless of if the child restraint is installed with the
lower anchors or the vehicle seat belt.

To install a child restraint, first, pull enough of the seat
WARNING!
belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate
increased head motion and possible injury to the into the buckle. Next, extract all the seat belt webbing out
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether retractor. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten
strap. the lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasion-
Installing the Child Restraint Using the Vehicle ally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Seat Belts
Once you have completed securing the child restraint
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
with the seat belt secure the top tether strap. Refer to
equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor
⬙Installing the Top Tether Strap⬙ earlier in this section for
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat
instructions.
belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary Transporting Pets
to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
additional information on ALR, refer to “Automatic a collision.
Locking Mode” in this section.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE

(COMMERCIAL VEHICLES ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED 2
Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a
family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children
in the front passenger seat. However, if you must carry a
child in a vehicle without a rear seat, the passenger seat
should be moved to the full rearward position and the
child must be in a proper restraint system based on its
age, size and weight.
Commercial Child Restraint Tether Anchor
WARNING! This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether
NEVER carry a child in a rear facing infant carrier in anchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger
a vehicle without rear seats. In an accident, serious seat. Use this tether anchor to secure only forward-
injury or death may occur from the deploying pas- facing child restraints equipped with an upper tether
senger airbag. strap.

• The forward-facing child seat is for children from
WARNING!
about 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and more than one year
Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be se- old.
cured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a
• A convertible child seat, one that is designed to be used
passenger airbag. In an accident, a passenger airbag
for children who are too heavy for a rearward-facing
may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants
infant seat, may be used IN THE FORWARD FACING
riding in rearward-facing infant restraints.
POSITION ONLY, IT MUST NEVER BE INSTALLED
FACING TO THE REAR IN A VEHICLE EQUIPPED
Restraining Infants and Small Children with Seat
WITH THE REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE (Commer-
Delete Feature (Commercial Vehicles Only)
cial Vehicles Only). When a convertible seat is properly
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
installed facing forward, the vehicle seat should be
children from newborn size to the child almost large
adjusted to the rear most position.
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is
correct for your child: • Children more than 40 lbs (18 kg) should be secured in
the passenger seat in a child restraint or belt-
• The rearward-facing infant carrier is for babies weigh-
positioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to the
ing up to about 20 lbs (9 kg), and less than one year
rear most position. Older children who do not use
old. THIS TYPE OF SEAT CANNOT BE USED IN A
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DE-
should ride properly buckled in the passenger seat
LETE FEATURE (Commercial Vehicles Only).

with the seat adjusted to the rearmost position. Never 4. Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether
allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them strap, attach the child restraint tether strap to the metal
or under their arm. anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat.
Tether Installation for Commercial Vehicles with 5. Following the child seat manufacturer’s instructions, 2
Rear Seat Delete tighten the child restraint tether strap.
To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the
6. Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks, abrasions,
vehicle, follow the instructions shown:
discoloration, and loose threads. If these, or any other
1. Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower condition that might affect the performance of the strap is
rear of the front passenger seat. observed, DO NOT USE. Contact your authorized deal-
ership for a replacement part.
2. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the
extended tether strap.
3. Route the tether strap under the head rest.
NOTE: Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is
centered between the headrest supports underneath the
head rest.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
WARNING!
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used with Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
a child restraint only. It should not be used for any mental and should be avoided.
other purpose. Before use, inspect the tether anchor
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
strap for nicks, abrasions, discoloration, and loose
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
threads. If these or any other condition that might
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
affect the performance of the strap is observed, DO
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
NOT USE that strap. Personal injury may result.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
Contact your authorized dealership for a replacement
shown in “Engine Oil”, under “Maintenance Procedures”
part.
in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT OR
STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
your vehicle. thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). preted as an indication of difficulty.
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
WARNING!
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA. Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon 2
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
WARNING! Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
follow these safety tips:
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
ously injured or killed.
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your out of the area.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
using a seat belt properly. outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
sure that all windows are closed and the climate control Vehicle
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the
Seat Belts
recirculation mode.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- or retractor condition, replace the belt.
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
Airbag Warning Light
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.

Defroster Lights
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
the air directed against the windshield. See your autho- beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. 2
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Door Latches
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
the Vehicle
Fluid Leaks
Tires Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. located and corrected immediately.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 ▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . 104
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . 108
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . 104
䡵 uconnect™ phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
䡵 Voice Recognition (VR) System —
▫ Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
䡵 Blind Spot Monitoring — If Equipped . . . . . . . 108
▫ Outside Mirror Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 107

100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ▫ Third Row Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . 138
▫ Manual Front And Second Row 䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 142
Seat Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . 118 Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Manual Lumbar Adjust Lever — ▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 (Available With Memory Seat Only) . . . . . . . 145
▫ Eight–Way Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . 120 䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Adjusting Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . 123 ▫ Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Stow ’n Go威 Seating — If Equipped . . . . . . . 125 ▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Easy Access Seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 ▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Swivel ’n Go™ Premium Seating — If ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 150
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . 151
▫ Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . . 137
▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 151

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 152 ▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 152 ▫ Deactivating Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . 160
▫ Battery Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 ▫ Resuming Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 ▫ Varying The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
3
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 ▫ Accelerating To Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 䡵 Parksense威 Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 162
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 ▫ Parksense威 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 ▫ Parksense威 Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
䡵 Windshield Wiper And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . 154 ▫ Parksense威 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
䡵 Tilt Steering Column — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 156 ▫ Enabling/Disabling Parksense威 . . . . . . . . . . 167
䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 158 ▫ Service Parksense威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 159 ▫ Cleaning Parksense威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 ▫ Parksense威 System Usage Precautions . . . . . . 168

䡵 Parkview威 Rear Back Up Camera — 䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Power Sunroof Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off —
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped . . . . . . 185
With Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off —
Without Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
䡵 Overhead Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 ▫ Instrument Panel Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Front Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 ▫ Interior Bottle Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 176 ▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . 190
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 180 ▫ Glove Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 ▫ Door Trim Panel Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 ▫ Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped . . . . 193
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 ▫ Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

▫ Second Row Seat Storage Bins — ▫ Premium Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 199
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Storage Bin Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Coat Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
䡵 Load-Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Cargo Area Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 3
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 205
䡵 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
䡵 Sun Screens — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Basic Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
When using this feature the mirror will automatically
adjust for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You
can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the
base of the mirror. A light next to the button will
illuminate when the dimming feature is activated.

Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING! 3
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging
Automatic Dimming Mirror the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
CAUTION!
Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
mirror clean.
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the

inside mirror. The mirror will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Outside Mirror Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and
normal.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
Use the mirror select switch located on the driver’s door
trim panel to adjust the view obtained in the outside
mirrors. Press the switch to the L (left) or R (right) for
mirror selection. Press the mirror select switch again to Power Side Mirror Adjust
guard against accidentally moving a mirror position. The 1 — Left Mirror 3 — Adjusting Switch
mirror selection will also automatically turn off after 2 — Right Mirror
30 seconds. Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the
direction you want the mirror to move.

Driver’s side power mirror preselected positions can be will move slightly downward from the present position
controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature. when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver’s
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in Section 3. outside mirror will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
Mirrors in Reverse position. 3
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not en-
this section, for further information. abled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Elec-
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Tilt
(Available with Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped
Mirrors in Reverse” under “Customer-Programmable
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
Features” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
(EVIC) in Section 4.
rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside mirror

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped uconnect™ phone — IF EQUIPPED
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in the uconnect™ User
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights. VOICE RECOGNITION (VR) SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Refer to “Voice Recognition (VR)” in the uconnect™ User
BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect Highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Illuminated Mirror

The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap-
proximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approxi- 3
mately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
Rear Detection Zones detection zones.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
be momentarily illuminated in both outside rear view
mirrors to let the driver know that the system is opera-
tional. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle
is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by
mode when the vehicle is in PARK.

• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer
or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where Sensor Locations
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
(bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors.

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either 3
side of the vehicle.
BSM Warning Light

The BSM system can also be configured to sound an
audible (chime) alert and mute the radio to notify the
driver of objects that have entered the detection zones.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” in this section.
Side Monitoring

Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
3
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects

The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
WARNING!
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes. The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
Opposing Traffic slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible 3
alarms, including radio muting.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
RCP Detection Zones parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maxi- vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
mum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
parking lot situations. death.

Modes Of Operation Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime, the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
“Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn
under ⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
Section 4. present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
Blind Spot Alert
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond NOTE:
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected • Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, system, the radio is also muted.
the radio is muted.
• If the Hazard Flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected

object is present. Whenever an audible alert is re- SEATS
quested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe
chime. operation of the vehicle.
Blind Spot Alert Off
WARNING! 3
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems. • DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

Manual Front And Second Row Seat Adjuster
WARNING!
The adjusting bar is located under the front of the seat.
Pull the bar upward and move the seat to the desired Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
position. Release the bar to lock the seat into position. dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched. properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped

The recliner control lever is on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then
push back to the desired position and release the lever.
Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to
its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward
and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has
latched.
Manual Seat Adjuster

Manual Lumbar Adjust Lever — If Equipped
The lumbar adjustment lever is located on the outboard
side of the seat. To increase the support, rotate the lever
downward. To decrease the support, rotate the handle
upward.
3
Manual Reclining Seat Control
WARNING!
DO NOT ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or fatally injured. Use the recliner only Manual Lumbar Lever
when the vehicle is parked.

WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
Eight–Way Power Seats — If Equipped

The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the seats. The front switch controls the up/down,
forward/rearward and tilt adjustment. The rear switch
controls the recline adjustment of the seatback. Driver Power Seat Switch
1 — Front Switch 2 — Rear Switch

Heated Seats — If Equipped
WARNING!
This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats.
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is The controls for front heated seats are located on the
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could center instrument panel area.
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each 3
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for
CAUTION! Off.
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or Press the switch once to select High-level heat-
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to ing. Press the switch a second time to select
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s to shut the heating elements Off.
path.

Second row heated seat switches are located in the
WARNING!
sliding side door handle trim panels and function the
same as front switches. Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. DO NOT place anything on the seat
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Heated Seat Switch

Adjusting Active Head Restraints To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
Active Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury in restraint (on some models, you may need to press the
the event of a rear impact. The Active Head Restraint push button). To lower the head restraint, press the push
should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
located above the top of your ear. downward on the head restraint.
3
Adjusted Head Restraint Push Button

For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull outward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)

NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of • Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
the head restraints require removal, see your autho- Restraint, such as coats or seat covers. These items
rized dealer. may interfere with the operation of the Active
Head Restraint in the event of an accident and
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re- could result in serious injury or death.
3
straint, refer to “Resetting Active Head Restraints
(AHR)” under “Occupant Restraints” in Section 2. Stow ’n Go姞 Seating — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go威 seating, the
WARNING! second and third row seats may be folded into the floor
• Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed for convenient storage.
or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury To Fold Second Row Seats
or death in the event of a collision. The head
restraints should always be checked prior to oper- 1. Move the front seat fully forward.
ating the vehicle and never adjusted while the 2. Lower the head restraints and raise the armrests on the
vehicle is in motion. Always adjust the head second row seat.
restraints when the vehicle is in PARK.
(Continued)

3. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the 4. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever located on the
⬙LOCK⬙ position and then pull up on the storage bin latch outboard side of the seat and fold the seatback down. To
to open the cover. assure the seatback is latched in the folded position,
additional downward pressure on the seatback may be
required when folding.
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
Second Row Seatback Release Lever

5. Pull rearward on the release strap located at the rear of
CAUTION!
the seat and tumble the seat forward into the storage bin.
The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
3
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• DO NOT drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
Second Row Seat Release Strap
• DO NOT use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
6. Close the storage bin cover.
To Unfold Second Row Seats
1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover.

2. Pull up on the handle to lift the seat out of the storage
bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors.
Second Row Seatback Release Lever

4. Adjust the head restraint to the desired position, close
Second Row Seat Release Handle the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking
3. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever, located on mechanism to the ⬙Unlocked⬙ position.
the outboard side of the seat, to return the seatback to its Easy Access Seating
full upright position. The second row Stow ’n Go威 seats can be tilted forward
for easy access to the third row seat or rear cargo area.

To tilt the seat, pull forward on the release strap located
WARNING!
on the front of the seat between the seatback and seat
cushion and tilt the seat fully forward. In the event of a collision you could be injured if the
seat is not fully latched.
To return the seat to its upright position, push rearward
on the seatback until it latches. Always ensure that it is
fully latched.
Swivel ’n Go™ Premium Seating — If Equipped 3
Premium second row Swivel ’n Go™ Seating features
include:
• A table that installs between the second and third row
seats. The table disassembles and stows in the hidden
second row floor storage bin
• Seats rotate to face forward or rearward
• Seat belts are integrated into the swivel seats
• Dual folding armrests
• A side storage pocket that will accommodate a phone
or handheld game
Tilting Second Row Stow ’n Go威 Seat

• Seats are removable
WARNING!
When the seatback release handle is lifted, the seat-
back will rotate forward. To avoid injury, if you are
not seated in the seat, stay clear from the area in the
path of the rotating seatback.
To swivel the seat: Pull the lower handle on the outboard

side of the seat and push the side of the seatback to begin
rotation. Once the seat begins to rotate, the handle may
be released. The seat locks in position once reaching the
forward or rearward positions only.
Swivel ’n Go™ Seating Features

1 — Moveable Armrest 4 — Fore-Aft Adjustment
2 — Seatback Release 5 — Seat Release
3 — Swivel Release

WARNING!
could result in serious injury or even death:
• NEVER place any child seat or infant carrier in the
Swivel ’n Go™ seat while it is in the rearward 3
facing position.
• The swivel seat should be locked in the forward
position when using any child seat or infant
carriers, with the vehicle in motion.
• Occupants riding in Swivel ’n Go™ seating must
be wearing their seat belt and the seat must be
Swivel Release
locked in either the forward-facing or rearward-
Seatbacks fold forward on an angle, not flat. This allows facing position.
the seats to swivel when the seatbacks are folded.
• Make sure the Swivel ’n Go™ seat is in a locked
position with the release handle fully engaged.
Test the seat after it is locked to see that it doesn’t
swivel.

Removing Swivel ’n Go™ Premium Seating — If 3. From behind the seat, lift up on the rear of the seat
Equipped cushion while pulling the seat in a rearward direction.
1. Remove any obstructions from the floor behind the 4. Remove the seat from vehicle through the liftgate.
seat, and stow the third row seat. Rollers are part of the seat frame and will ease the
removal process.
2. Pull up on the release bar located at the bottom front
edge of the swivel seat. 5. Lower the release handle located at the bottom front
edge of the seat.
Each seat weighs about 90 lbs (81 kg).
NOTE: Electrical contacts for the available heated seats
automatically disengage or engage as the seat is removed
or installed. The contacts slide past each other as the seat
is rolled to and from the strikers.
When reinstalling the seat, make certain to lower the
release handle to ensure the seat is latched securely.
Release Bar

WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched. 3
Swivel ’n Go™ Premium Seating Table — If
Equipped
The Swivel ’n Go™ Seating Table consists of an easily
assembled post and top.
Second Row Seating and Table

The table and leg are stored beneath the floor when not in 3. Swivel the second row seats so they are facing the rear.
use. To install the table follow these steps:
4. Insert pole into base by aligning the lock button into
1. Open the floor storage cover in front of the second row notch of the base.
seats.
Installing Table Leg Into Base

Table and Leg Storage 1 — Table Base 2 — Lock/Release Button
2. Remove the pole and table top by loosening the hook
5. Twist the pole in a clockwise rotation until it stops.
and loop straps.

NOTE: You will hear an audible “click” when the lock
WARNING!
button engages the base.
6. Place the table top over the installed pole aligning
could result in serious injury or even death:
with the mating feature of the underside of the table top.
Apply pressure on the table top and press downward. • DO NOT install the table while vehicle is in
motion. 3
NOTE: You will hear an audible “click” when the table • NEVER drive the vehicle with only the pole in-
latch engages the pole. stalled.
• DO NOT place heavy or sharp objects on table.
• DO NOT place liquid drinks on the table, use
available cupholders.
• Second row seats must be locked in the rearward
facing position before installing the table.

To separate the table top from the pole, follow these 3. While pulling on the latch, pull upward to remove the
steps: table top from the pole.
1. Locate the release latch on the underside of the table NOTE: The table top should be removed from the leg
top. prior to removing the leg from its mounting base.
4. Locate the release button on the pole. Press the release
button firmly to activate the release from the base.
5. While pressing the release button, twist the pole in a
counterclockwise rotation until it stops. Pull upward to
remove the pole from the base.
6. Place the pole on the underside of the table top and
secure with the hook and loop straps.
7. Once the pole and table top are secured, you may
place them in the floor storage bin in front of the second
row seats.
Table Top Release
NOTE: Always store the table and pole in the floor
2. Pull horizontally on the latch to activate the release storage bin when not in use.
from the pole.

Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and
some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of
the bagged goods.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped 3
While the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is
removable for added cargo space. Release levers are
located on the rear leg assemblies, near the floor. To
remove the seat, squeeze each release handle and rotate
downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock indicator button
pops up when the seat is unlocked. The seat assembly Release Handles
can now be removed from the vehicle and moved on its
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent posi-
Easy Out威 Rollers.
tions on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotate
upward until the lock indicator button returns into the
handle.

WARNING!
If not properly latched, the bench seats could become
loose. Personal injuries could result. After reinstall-
ing these seats, be sure the red indicator button on
the release handles return into the handles.
Third Row Power Seat — If Equipped

The third row power seat offers the following features:
• The seatbacks can be folded forward for additional
cargo space if needed.
• Head restraints can be stowed with the seat. Third Row Power Seat Switch
Third Row Power Seat Switch — If Equipped
• Tailgate mode flips the seat rearward to face out the
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
tailgate.
left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
The power recline feature, located on the side of the seat
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open
cushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward
and the vehicle is in PARK.
for occupant comfort.

One Touch Folding Seat Third Row Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and 1 — Open to Normal 4 — Fold Flat
unfolding positions for the third row seats. 2 — Stow 5 — Right/Left Seats
3 — Tailgate 5 — Both Seats
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually
or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to
the following positions using the switch bank located on
the left rear trim panel:

NOTE: 2. Pull release strap marked “1” located on the rear of the
• Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small seat to lower the seatback.
buckle and lower the head restraints before attempting
3. Pull release strap marked “2” to release the anchors.
to fold/stow the power third row seats.
• To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, press a
different seat position selector switch to stop the seat.
Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position
can be selected.
• The third row power seat system includes obstacle
detection for safe operation. When the system detects
an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse the
motion a short distance to move the seat away from
the obstacle. Should this occur, remove the obstacle
and press the button again, for the desired position.
To Fold Third Row Seats Manually — If Equipped Folding Third Row Seat Strap
1. Lower the head restraint to its full down position. 4. Pull release strap marked “3” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.

To Unfold Third Row Seats Tailgate Mode
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the 1. Pull release strap “2”, then pull release strap “3” to
storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors rotate the entire seat rearward.
latch.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to unlock the recliner. 3
3. Pulling strap “3” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
4. Adjust the head restraint to the desired position.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched. Tailgate Positioning Release Straps 2 and 3
2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the
seatback and push forward until the anchors latch.

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death, NEVER operate the
vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in
the tailgate mode.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED

The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel
can be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, driver’s
outside mirror, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals,
and radio station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be programmed to
Driver Memory Switch
recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is
pressed. Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE
transmitters. Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to
each of the memory positions.

Setting Memory Positions and Linking RKE 5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
Transmitter to Memory to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).
NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered 6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
button (1 or 2) is pressed, you erase the memory settings remove the key.
for that button and store a new one.
7. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the 3
1. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to driver’s door.
the ON position.
8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button performed within 10 seconds if you desire to also use a
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
to complete the memory recall before continuing to
transmitters.
Step 3.
10. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s side-
the ON position.
view mirror to the desired positions.
4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired
positions.

11. Select ⬙Remote Linked to Memory⬙ in the Electronic To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter “Yes”. Refer MEMORY button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
to the “Customer-Programmable Features” in the “Elec- button on the RKE transmitter linked to Memory Position
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” section for 2.
more information.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next Memory MEMORY buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S,
position using the other numbered Memory button or to 1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
link another RKE transmitter to memory. driver’s mirror, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of
one second will occur before another recall can be
Memory Position Recall
selected.
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
To Disable RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK 2. Press and release MEMORY button 1. The system will
button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position recall any memory settings stored in position 1. Wait for
1. the system to complete the memory recall before continu-
ing to Step 3.

3. Press and release the memory SET (S) button located Easy Entry/Exit Seat
on the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling that (Available with Memory Seat ONLY)
you are in the memory set mode. This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
vehicle.
button 1 on the driver’s door. A chime will sound
signaling to you that the driver memory has been set. The distance the driver seat moves depends on where 3
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
key from the ignition switch.
button on the RKE transmitter. A chime will sound
signaling to you that the RKE transmitter link has been • When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
successfully disabled. the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm)
rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or
To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either
equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The
Memory Position, repeat Steps 1 to 5 for each RKE
seat will return to its previously set position when you
transmitter.
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked the LOCK position.
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
Refer to the Remote Linked to Memory ⬙Customer- • When you remove the key from the ignition switch the
Programmable Features⬙ in the Electronic Vehicle Infor- driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm)
mation Center (EVIC) for more information. forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is

between 0.9 – 2.7 in (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of the TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set To open the hood, two latches must be released.
position when you insert the key into the ignition
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument
switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
panel, below the steering column.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit Position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be en-
abled or disabled through the programmable features in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If your
vehicle is not equipped with an EVIC, your dealership
can activate/deactivate this feature for you. For details, Hood Release Lever
refer to “Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit,” section
of this manual.

2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the
CAUTION!
center of the hood opening. Locate, then push the safety
catch lever to the right while raising the hood at the same To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
time. close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 12 in (30 cm) and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless 3
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
Safety Lever Location

Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position.

LIGHTS Interior Lighting
All of the lights, except the Hazard Warning lights, Interior lights are turned on when a door or liftgate is
headlight high beams and flash-to-pass, are controlled by opened, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
switches to the left of the steering column on the instru- activated, or when the dimmer control is moved to the
ment panel. extreme top.
The interior lights will automatically turn off in approxi-
mately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds
every activation thereafter until the engine is started, if
one of the following occur:
• A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open
• Any overhead reading light is left on
NOTE: The key must be out of the ignition switch or the
ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this
feature to operate.
Headlight Switch With Halo Control

Dome Light Positions Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control completely Rotate the dimmer control to the first
upward to the second detent (extreme detent. This feature brightens the
top position) to turn on the interior odometer, radio and overhead dis-
lights. The interior lights will remain plays when the parking lights or head-
on when the dimmer control is in this lights are on. 3
position.
Interior Lighting Defeat (Off) Dimmer Control

Rotate the dimmer control to the off With the parking lights or headlights
position (extreme bottom). The inte- on, rotating the dimmer control for the
rior lights will remain off when the interior lights on the instrument panel
doors or liftgate are open. upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights.

Halo Lights — If Equipped To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
Halo lights are strategically placed soft lighting that help rotate the dimmer control up or down.
to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
locating specific features while driving at night.
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
To activate the Halo lights, push in the Halo based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
switch control knob. Pressing the switch con- the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise
trol knob in a second time will turn the Halo position aligning the indicator with the A (AUTO) on the
lights off. headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight
Time Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights
Parking Lights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
Turn the headlight switch knob to the first detent
ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off,
to turn on the parking lights. This also turns on all
turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O (OFF)
instrument panel lighting.
position.
Headlights
Turn the headlight switch knob to the second
detent to turn the headlights and parking lights
on. This also turns on all instrument panel
lighting.

on when windshield wipers are on may be found on
vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system.
Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
in Section 4 under “Personal Settings (customer-pro-
grammable features)” for more information.
Headlight Delay — If Equipped 3
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay inter-
Automatic Headlights val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head- headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the
lights will come on in the Automatic mode. ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have
When your headlights are in the Automatic mode and the the headlights remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds or not
engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn remain on. To change the timer setting, see your autho-
on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights rized dealer.

The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condi-
equipped with an EVIC. Refer to “Delay Turning Head- tion until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate
lights Off,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-Pro- at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brake
grammable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Infor- is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn
mation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4. off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the
same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
will turn off in the normal manner.
longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45 sec-
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
onds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
Lights-On Reminder lights or the low beam headlights and push in the
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on, or if the headlight switch control knob. Pressing the head-
dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the light switch control knob in a second time will turn the
ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when front fog lights off.
the driver’s door is opened.
Battery Protection
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the down the battery if the headlights, parking lights, or
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear front fog lights are left on for extended periods of time

when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. After • Front and Rear Wipers — Washer Functions
eight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK
Turn Signals
position and the headlight switch in any position other
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
switch. 3
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition switch is turned to any other position other than
LOCK during the three minute delay.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
The multifunction lever controls the:
• Turn Signals
• Headlight Beams Low/High
Turn Signals
• Flash-To-Pass (Optical Horn)

NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or High/Low Beam Switch
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multi-
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is function lever toward the instrument panel will switch
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the
defective. neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam
operation.
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has Flash-To-Pass
traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
(1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound to lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
alert the driver. will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the lever is released.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
three times then automatically turn off. the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to select the desired wiper speed.
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-
vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the

off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off 1. Mist, Front Wiper and Washer
and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage Press the end of the multifunction lever inward to the
to the wiper motor may occur. first detent and release to clear the windshield. Pressing
the multifunction lever inward to the second detent will
cause the washers to spray for a maximum of 10 seconds,
or until the multifunction lever is released, and the 3
wipers will cycle three times.
NOTE:
• If the multifunction lever is depressed while in the
delay range, the wipers will operate for several sec-
onds after the multifunction lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
• If the multifunction lever is depressed while in the off
position, the wipers will operate for approximately
Washer And Wiper Controls two wipe cycles and automatically turn off.
1 — Front Mist/Washer 3 — Rear Wiper/Washer
2 — Wiper Speeds

2. Intermittent, Low and High Speed Wipers the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray
Use the intermittent wipers when weather conditions until the ring is released, and then resume the intermit-
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be- tent interval.
tween cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
NOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittent
tion lever to the first detent position, then turn the end of
wiper speed only.
the multifunction lever to select the desired delay inter-
val. The delay can be regulated from approximately two
WARNING!
seconds, to a maximum of 20 seconds between cycles.
The time delay will be doubled if the vehicle speed is less Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
than 10 mph (16 km/h). could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
Low-speed is achieved by rotating the multifunction
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
lever past the intermittent settings, to the first detent.
windshield with the defroster before and during
High-speed is achieved by rotating the multifunction windshield washer use.
lever past the intermittent settings, to the second detent.
3. Rear Wiper and Washer TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
rear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotate upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located on
the steering column, below the steering wheel.

To tilt the column, push the lever downward to the
WARNING!
unlocked position. Move the steering column up or
down, as desired. Pull the lever upward to the locked Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
position to lock the steering column firmly in place. moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve- 3
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
Tilt Steering Column Lever

1 — Locked Position
2 — Unlocked Position

ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED Press the button forward to move the pedals forward
This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals (toward the front of the vehicle).
to move toward, or away, from the driver to provide
Press the button rearward to move the pedals rearward
improved position with the steering wheel. The adjustable
(toward the driver).
pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of driver
comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat positions. The • The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
switch is located on the left side of the steering column.
• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys-
tem is on. The following messages will be displayed
on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In-
formation System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to
be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjust-
able Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
Adjustable Pedal Switch

CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the 3
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
Electronic Speed Control Lever
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the
simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Con-
accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
(40 km/h).
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.

To Activate To Set At A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button (located in the end of the lever) When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
once, and the cruise indicator light (located in the mes- the SET lever downward and then release. Lift your foot
sage window of the odometer) will illuminate, showing off the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
that the Electronic Speed Control system is on. To turn selected speed.
the Electronic Speed Control system off, push the ON/
Deactivating Electronic Speed Control
OFF button a second time, and both the Electronic Speed
A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the Electronic
Control system and indicator will turn off.
Speed Control lever (CANCEL) toward you will deacti-
vate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set
WARNING!
speed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to the OFF
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on position or turning OFF the ignition erases the set speed
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidently memory.
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
Resuming Speed
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
To resume a previously set speed, raise the Electronic
leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when
Speed Control lever (RESUME ACCEL) upward, and
you are not using it.
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph
(40 km/h).

Varying The Speed Setting in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the lever is released.
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- Release the Electronic Speed Control lever when the
crease speed by pushing up and holding the Electronic desired speed is reached, and a new set speed will be
Speed Control lever in RESUME ACCEL. If the lever is established.
held in the RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will
Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to SET DE-
continue to increase in 5 mph(10 km/h) increments until 3
CEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed
the lever is released. When the Electronic Speed Control
decrease. Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is
lever is released, a new set speed will be established.
tapped, speed decreases.
Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to RESUME
Accelerating To Pass
ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed
Press the accelerator as you normally would. When the
increase. Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
tapped speed increases, so tapping the Electronic Speed
Control lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
(4.8 km/h), etc. speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set,
push down and hold the Electronic Speed Control lever
in SET DECEL. If the lever is continually held in the SET
DECEL position, the set speed will continue to decrease

Your vehicle may experience a downshift (automatic PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
transmissions only) while climbing uphill or descending EQUIPPED
downhill. This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system provides visual
set speed. and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and the detected obstacle when backing up. Refer
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, so
to ParkSense威 System Usage Precautions for limitations
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
of this system and recommendations.
Control.
ParkSense威 will remember the last system state (enabled
WARNING! or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the RUN/ON position.
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve- ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you REVERSE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at this shift lever
could lose control. An accident could be the result. position, the system will be active until the vehicle speed
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or above. The system will be active again if the vehicle
slippery. speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).

ParkSense姞 Sensors The ParkSense威 Warning Display is located in the Instru-
The ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/ ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
within the sensors’ field of view. rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear 3
fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on
the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense姞 Warning Display
The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer-
Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” under “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
ParkSense威 Warning Display

ParkSense姞 Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
Park Assist Disabled

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a 1⁄2 second tone. As the
Park Assist ON vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will
show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from
slow, to fast, to continuous.

Slow Tone Fast Tone

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning display operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone

WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY MESSAGE OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: ARC’s AUDIBLE SIGNAL
REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER
Park Assist ON None None
Warning Object Detected 78.7 in (200 cm) 3 Solid Yes, 1/2 second
Warning Object Detected 39.3 in (100 cm) 3 Flashing Slow Tone
3
Warning Object Detected 27.5 in (70 cm) 31.4 in (80 cm) 3 Flashing Slow Tone
Warning Object Detected 25.5 in (65 cm) 25.5 in (65 cm) 2 Flashing Fast Tone
Warning Object Detected 11.8 in (30 cm) 11.8 in (30 cm) 1 Flashing Continuous Tone
NOTE: ParkSense威 will MUTE the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling/Disabling ParkSense姞 As soon as the system is disabled, the instrument cluster
You can turn ParkSense威 ON or OFF through the EVIC. will display the “PARK ASSIST DISABLED” message,
The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
Display. For details, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.

When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
system is disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after mak-
ASSIST DISABLED” message for as long as the vehicle is ing sure the rear fascia/bumper is free from snow, ice,
in REVERSE. mud, dirt and debris, see your authorized dealer.
Service ParkSense姞 Cleaning ParkSense姞
When the ParkSense威 system is defective, the instrument Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap
cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
cycle, and it will display the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa- age the sensors.
tion Center (EVIC)” in Section 4. When the shift lever is
ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a
faulted condition, the EVIC will display the “SERVICE NOTE:
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition ParkSense威 to keep the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system oper-
will not operate. ating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the ParkSense威 system.

• When you turn ParkSense威 off, the instrument cluster • Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care
will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED.” Further- not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
more, once you turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt, or debris.
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition Failure to do so can result in the ParkSense威 system
key. not working properly. The ParkSense威 system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it 3
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the instrument
behind the fascia/bumper.
cluster will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED” mes-
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. • Objects must not be within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
• ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
sounding a tone.
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
• If a ParkSense威 system malfunction occurs, a single PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
chime will sound once per ignition cycle. In addition, the instrument cluster.
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
display “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM”. If this
occurs making sure the rear fascia/bumper is free
from snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris, see your autho-
rized dealer.

CAUTION! WARNING!
• ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable • Drivers must be careful when backing up even
to recognize every obstacle, including small ob- when using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist sys-
stacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily de- tem. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
tected or not detected at all. Obstacles located look behind you, and be sure to check for pedes-
above or below the ParkSense威 sensors will not be trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
detected when they are in close proximity. blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using for safety and must continue to pay attention to
ParkSense威 to be able to stop in time when the your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the serious injury or death.
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using (Continued)
ParkSense威.

PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
• Before using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected image of the rear of your vehicle whenever the shift lever
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
3
Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen. The Park-
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch View威 camera is located in the light bar over the rear
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the license plate.
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
single flashing arc and sounds the continuous WARNING!
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
behind the vehicle. check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

3. Press the “camera setup” soft key.
CAUTION!
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only ⬙enable rear camera in reverse⬙ soft key.
be used as a parking aid. The camera is unable to
view every obstacle or object in your drive path. 5. Press the “save” soft key.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be 6. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of
driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom- ⬙check entire surroundings⬙ displayed across the top of
mended that the driver look frequently over his/ the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
her shoulder when using ParkView威. 7. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up on appears again.
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. Turning ParkView姞 On or Off — Without
Navigation Radio
Turning ParkView姞 On or Off — With Navigation
1. Press the ⬙menu⬙ hard key.
Radio
2. Select ⬙system setup⬙ soft key.
1. Press the ⬙menu⬙ hard key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
2. Select ⬙system setup⬙ soft key. ⬙enable rear camera in reverse⬙ soft key.

4. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of NOTE: Premium sunroof console models include all of
the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to above except sunglass storage.
⬙check entire surroundings⬙ displayed across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
5. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears again. 3
OVERHEAD CONSOLES
Front Overhead Console
Two versions of the overhead console are available. The
base front overhead console model featured fixed incan-
descent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass stor-
age and conversation mirror. The premium front over-
head console model features a LED focused light that Front Premium Overhead Console Features
illuminates the instrument panel cupholders, Infrared 1 — Cupholder LED 4 — Storage/Mirror
Automatic Temperature Control Sensor (ATC equipped 2 — ATC Sensor 5 — Switch Bank
only), two swiveling LED lights, flip-down sunglass 3 — Interior Lights
storage, conversation mirror, optional power sliding door
switches and an optional power liftgate switch.

Courtesy/Interior Lighting Sunglass Storage (non-sunroof only)
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights At the rear of the front overhead console, a compartment
(standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on is provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.
when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened.
From the closed position, press the door over-travel latch
If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry
to open the compartment. The door will slowly rotate to
(RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK
the full open position. From this position, the door can be
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
fully closed or, by rotating upward about 3/4 of the way
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press and releasing, positioned for conversation mirror use.
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
From the ⬙conversation mirror⬙ position, the door can
vehicle. Press a second time to turn each light off. You
only be closed. To return to the full open position, the
may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the
door must first be closed and then opened by pressing
outside ring, which is identified with four directional
the over-travel latch again to release.
arrows (LED lamps only).
NOTE: The front overhead console supplied with fac-
The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also
tory sunroof, incorporates a sunroof switch.
illuminated from a light in the overhead console (pre-
mium console only). This light is turned on when the Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped
headlight switch is on, and will adjust in brightness when The rear overhead storage system is available in two
the dimmer control is rotated up or down. versions: with or without sunroof.

An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
down on the front foot-well area while in courtesy mode, The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights. The
for added convenience. lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the
liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on
when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is 3
pressed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light off.
You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing
the outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows.
Overhead Compartment Features

1 — DVD 1 5 — Storage
2 — Rear HVAC 6 — DVD 1
3 — Interior Lights 7 — Interior Lights
4 — Storage 8 — Halo Lighting
1
If equipped, otherwise storage.

Rear Console Halo Lighting
The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting
around the perimeter of the console base. This feature
provides additional lighting options while traveling and
is controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to ”Halo
Lights — If Equipped” under “Lights” in Section 3.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery. HomeLink威 Buttons
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the headliner NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威 rity Alarm is active.
channels.

Programming HomeLink姞
WARNING!
Before You Begin
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
while you are training the universal transceiver.
erase all channels before you begin training.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up 3
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
safety standards. This includes most garage door
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
use a garage door opener without these safety
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety infor- Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
mation or assistance. when programming.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan- Begin Programming
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
cause serious injury or death. 2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.

Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away • After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the ga-
keeping the indicator light in view. rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code
HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button
System.”
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and handheld transmitter buttons. and observe the indicator light.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
open and close while you train.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
NOTE: then turns to a constant light, proceed to Step 5 “Pro-
• Some gate operators and garage door openers may gramming A Rolling Code System.”
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
5. Programming A Rolling Code System
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.

This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. It is button. The name and color of the button may vary by
NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer.
door.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
3
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Training The Garage Door Opener
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.

Using HomeLink威 Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
To operate, press and release the programmed Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
used at any time. time-out in the same manner.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink威 Button It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
follow these steps: door or gate motor.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
HomeLink威” Step 3, with the following:
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button. 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indica- Troubleshooting Tips
tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
trained. are some of the most common solutions:
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in • Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
at this time.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener 3
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
HomeLink威,” earlier in this section.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
Security to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
in your vehicle.
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
General Information
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
erased.
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when two conditions:
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference that may be Power Sunroof Operation
received including interference that may cause undesired
Opening the Sunroof Manually
operation.
Press the switch rearward and hold, and the sunroof will
NOTE: open automatically from any position. The sunroof will
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with open fully, then stop automatically. During this opera-
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not tion, any release of the sunroof switch will stop the
expressly approved by the party responsible for com- sunroof.
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device. WARNING!
• The term IC before the certification/registration num- In an accident, there is greater risk of being thrown
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
specifications were met. be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED properly secured.
The power sunroof control switch is located in the front
overhead console.
The sunroof panel tilts upward at the rear for ventilation
or slides rearward under the roof.

Closing the Sunroof Manually Express Open
To close the sunroof from an open or vent position, press Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
and hold the switch forward. The sunroof will close fully will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
and stop automatically. Release the switch to stop sun- will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
roof travel at any point. “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
Sunroof Sunshade Operation movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. 3
The sunroof sunshade can be opened manually. How- Express Vent
ever, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button, and the sunroof will
opens. automatically open to the vent position. This is called
“Express Vent”.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open. Express Close
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
WARNING! will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the will close fully, then stop automatically. This is called
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
children, can become entrapped by the power sun- movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

Auto Express will stop and reverse travel up to three
WARNING!
times in succession. After the third time, Auto Express
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. will enter a manual operation mode. This allows the
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any operator to manually control the power switch, in order
object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury to close or open the sunroof in case of a malfunction.
may result.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
Ignition Off Operation
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 10 min-
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
utes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
either front door will cancel this feature.
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
Auto-Express with Anti-Pinch Protection rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
During express closing, anytime an obstacle that restricts the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
glass movement is detected, the motor will stop and together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
reverse travel to avoid pinching the object. with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.

Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED

Two 12 Volt power outlets are located on the lower
instrument panel, next to the open storage bin. The upper
3
power outlet is controlled by the ignition switch and the
lower power outlet is connected directly to the battery.
The upper power outlet will also operate a conventional
cigar lighter unit (if equipped with an optional Smoker’s
Package).
12 Volt Power Outlets
NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR威 cigar
knob and element must be used. One outlet in the removable floor console shares a fuse
with the lower outlet in the instrument panel and is also
connected to the battery. Do not exceed a maximum
power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) shared between the lower
panel outlet and the removable floor console outlet.

The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate and
the upper outlet in the instrument panel are both con-
trolled by the ignition switch. Each of these outlets can • Close the lid when not in use and while driving
support 160 Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts the vehicle.
(13 Amps) for each of these outlets. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
The power outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a
key or battery symbol indicating the power source. The
power outlet, located on the lower instrument panel, is CAUTION!
powered directly from the battery. Items plugged into • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
prevent the engine from starting. use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
WARNING! discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
To avoid serious injury or death: and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Only devices designed for use in this type of (Continued)
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
(Continued)

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION! (Continued)
A 110 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet (if equipped) converts
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, DC current to AC current, and is located on the left rear
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the trim panel immediately behind the second row left
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter- passenger seat. This outlet can power cellular phones,
mittently and with greater caution. electronics and other low power devices requiring power
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
3
up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be will most power tools.
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces- the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
power outlet can cause damage. inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter

manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON. To turn on the power outlet, press the switch once. Press
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off.
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
Power Inverter Switch

Power Inverter Outlet
The power inverter switch is located near the center of
the instrument panel below the two 12 Volt power
outlets.

CUPHOLDERS
There are nine cupholders in the interior. Two cupholders
in the center front instrument panel, four in the floor
consoles and three more are located in the third row
quarter trim panel.
All liners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexible 3
liner from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one
edge for easy removal. Refer to “Cleaning The Instru-
ment Panel Cupholders” in Section 7.
Instrument Panel Cupholders
The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull-out
drawer just above the lower storage bin. Front Cupholders
Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place the
container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells.
The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide
variety of container types and sizes. Press down on the
container to engage the cupholder retention features.

Interior Bottle Holders
There are four bottle holders located in the interior. One
bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim
panels, and one bottle holder is molded into each side
sliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommo-
dates up to a 20 oz (1 L) plastic bottle.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn-
ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury. Interior Bottle Holder
Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating.
The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes,
toys, games or MP3 players, etc.
Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one

of the two cupholders in the center front instrument To close the compartment door, firmly push downward
panel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the on the door’s surface to release the detent and latch the
thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Press the ash door closed.
receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull
upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning
and/or storage. 3
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accom-
modate a second ash receiver, if desired.
STORAGE
Glove Compartments
There are both upper and lower glove compartments.
Upper Glove Compartment
To open the upper compartment, press in on the upper
latch. The door will spring open about 1 in (2.54 cm). Glove Compartment Features
Manually lift the front edge of the door upward until 1 — Lower Compartment 3 — Upper Latch
2 — Lower Latch/Lock 4 — Upper Compartment
fully opened and the detent is engaged.

Lower Glove Compartment
To open the lower compartment pull out on the release
handle.
NOTE: The lower compartment is equipped with a lock
that is part of the compartment handle (2).
Door Trim Panel Storage
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
Front Door Storage

1 — Rear Map Pocket 3 — Bottle Holder
2 — Storage Pocket 4 — Front Map Pocket

Sliding Side Door Bottle Holder Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped
Both sliding doors have a bottle holder molded right into The driver’s seatback has a primary storage pocket on all
the trim. models and an optional secondary mesh pocket.
Sliding Door Bottle Holder Driver’s Seatback Storage

1 — Bag Holder
2 — Standard Pocket
3 — Mesh Pocket

Umbrella Holder Second Row Seat Storage Bins — If Equipped
An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into The seat storage bins are located on the floor in front of
the left front door entry scuff molding. the second row seats. The area below the covers can be
used for storage when the second row seat is in the
upright position.
Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide
the storage bin locking mechanism to the ⬙Lock⬙ position
to allow greater access to the storage bin.
Umbrella Holder

CAUTION!
NOTE: The storage bin cover must be locked and flat
to avoid damage from contact with the front seat
tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover.
3
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• DO NOT drive the vehicle with the storage bin
Storage Bin covers open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• DO NOT use a storage bin latch as a tie down.

Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle: • Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING! • Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
• Always close the storage bin covers when your

vehicle is unattended. CAUTION!
• Do not allow children to have access to the second The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin, avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
young children may not be able to escape. If which have minimal clearance to the cover.
trapped in the storage bin, children can die from
suffocation or heat stroke. Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
• In an accident, serious injury could result if the As a security measure, your vehicle may be built with a
seat storage bin covers are not properly latched. Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release is built into the
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin storage bin cover latching mechanism.
covers open. Keep the storage bin covers closed
and latched while the vehicle is in motion.
(Continued)

NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark
lever attached to the storage bin cover latching
mechanism.
Coat Hooks 3
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit
is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit
can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever

Cargo Area Storage NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 foot
The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor
“Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearward with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved
cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate slightly forward of the rearmost position.
closing.
CONSOLE FEATURES
There are two consoles available: Basic and Premium.
Basic Console
Basic Console features consist of the following:
• The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to
easily pass through the first row to the second.
• Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage
cups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. Cupholders are
dishwasher safe for cleaning.
• The cupholders are removable to access a large storage
Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit bin.

• The basic console is removable from the vehicle for 4. Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down-
additional floor space by removing the cap and clip at ward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the
the console base. cover plug.
To Remove The Basic Floor Console 5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
1. Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip. 3
WARNING!
2. Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
clear the rear load floor hook.
removable floor console is not properly installed.
3. Remove the console. Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console
1. Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly Premium Console — If Equipped
higher than the rear). The three-compartment console with sliding storage bin,
sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage
2. Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/
bin offers multiple configurations.
hook.
• Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for clean-
3. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole
ing. The cupholders can accept plastic bottles, large
is centered on the winch hole.
cups or mugs with handles.

• Top tray storage
• Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs
or other items
• Large console center storage will store headphones for
the available rear DVD entertainment system or other
items
• 12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous power
inside the console for cell phones or other electronics.
• Rear occupant accessible
• Multiple adjustments Premium Console Features
• Removable from vehicle for additional floor space. 1 — Top Release 3 — Console Release
2 — Center Release
The top and center console sections slide forward and

rearward to provide added user comfort. A one-piece cup
holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for
cleaning. The cupholders will also accommodate large
size cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles.

Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders
and a convenient storage tray.
Console Position 2
Console Position 1
Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large
storage area below.

Dual Storage Bins Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost
Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a position. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front of
rearward position. This is accomplished by lifting the the console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin
upper most latch at the front of the console. This provides and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers.
easy access to the storage area below and provides two of
the four cupholders for the second row passengers.
Console Position 4
Console Position 3

To Remove The Premium Floor Console 5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
1. Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the
WARNING!
console.
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
2. Lift the rear of the console up several inches/
removable floor console is not properly installed.
centimeters. 3
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
3. Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove latched.
console.
To reinstall the console: REAR WINDOW FEATURES
1. Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightly Rear Window Defroster
higher than the front). The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to
2. Slide the console forward into the floor bracket. turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
3. Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
on the floor bracket. illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
4. Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
in the rear floor bracket. operation, press the button a second time.

NOTE:
• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
time. sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear win- • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
dow defroster only when the engine is operating.
LOAD-LEVELING SYSTEM
CAUTION!
The automatic load-leveling system will provide a level
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
the heating elements: conditions.
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to to complete depending on road surface conditions.
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water. If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately
15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
(Continued)
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED Attempt to move the crossbar again to ensure that it has
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry the properly locked into position.
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
NOTE: To help control wind noise when installing the
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
crossbars make sure the arrows marked on the underside
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
of the crossbars are facing the front of the vehicle. When
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars. the crossbars are not in use, the front crossbar should be 3
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying fastened just forward of the middle support and the rear
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo crossbar should be fastened at the rearmost position of
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not the side rails. This will help reduce the amount of wind
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity. noise when the crossbars are not in use.
To move the crossbars, loosen the thumb screws located The tie down holes on the crossbar ends should always
at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately six be used to tie down the load. Check the straps frequently
turns, then move the crossbar to the desired position, to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the
crossbar is in place, retighten the thumb screws to lock
the crossbar into position.

CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Crossbars should remain equally spaced or paral- • Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-
lel at any luggage rack position for proper func- fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
tion. Noncompliance could result in damage to the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
luggage rack, cargo and/or vehicle. nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do a load. This is especially true on large flat loads
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of and may result in damage to the cargo or your
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as vehicle.
evenly as possible and secure the load appropri-
ately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)

WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof 3
Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED

Sun screens are available for second and third row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels,
and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks Sun Screen Retracted
that the sun screens attach to when pulled out.

Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the
top of the window.
Sun Screen Extended

To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
Sun Screen Attaching To Retainer Clips base sill.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 4
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
䡵 Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) —
▫ Compass Display / ECO
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
(Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 238
▫ CMTC Reset Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Personal Settings
▫ Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . 231 (Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . . 240

210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 AM/FM/CD/DVD Radio (RER & RBZ) – 䡵 Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo Radio
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius
Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 259
▫ Operating Instructions — uconnect™ ▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio . . . . . 246 ▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RER Radio . . . . . 247 ▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 269
䡵 Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With ▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 269
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) —
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 250 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD ▫ Connecting The iPod威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using Radio
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 258 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 䡵 uconnect™ studios (Sirius Backseat TV™) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
䡵 Video Entertainment System (VES)™ —
䡵 uconnect™ studios (Satellite Radio) — If
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Equipped (REN/RER/RBZ/RES Radios Only). . 276
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius 4
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Selecting uconnect™ studios
(Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 䡵 CD/DVD Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 284
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Operating Instructions - uconnect™ studios ▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
(Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Operating Instructions - uconnect™ phone ▫ Three-Zone Temperature Control —
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

▫ Rear Manual Climate Control — ▫ Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ A/C Air Filter— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Winter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Vents 5 — Storage Bin 9 — Storage or DVD 13 — Switch Bank

2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Upper Glove Compartment 10 — Cup Holders 14 — Ignition Switch
3 — Shift Lever 7 — Lower Glove Compartment 11 — Storage Bin 15 — Dimmer Switch
4 — Radio 8 — Climate Controls 12 — Power Supply – 12V 16 — Headlight Switch

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – BASE

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – PREMIUM

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
1. Fuel Gauge
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
2. Fuel Door Reminder CAUTION!
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads
vehicle.
“H“, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
3. Temperature Gauge
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
remains on the “H”, and you hear continuous chimes,
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
turn the engine off immediately, and call an autho-
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
rized dealer for service.

continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
WARNING!
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or for a defective outside light bulb.
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
6. High Beam Indicator
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer if
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward
the hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual.
to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward
Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pres-
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam. 4
sure Cap paragraph.
7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
4. Speedometer This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
Indicates vehicle speed. (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
5. Turn Signal Indicators
stay on for as long as four seconds.
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
traveled about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
8. Brake Warning Light ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
This light monitors various brake functions, system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
including brake fluid level and parking brake indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
application. If the brake light turns on, it may when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that dropped below a specified level.
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
the brake fluid level checked.
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. sary.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
WARNING!
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately. 9. Tachometer — Premium Instrument Cluster Only
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. 4
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the prevent engine damage.
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS 10. Shift Lever Indicator
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
automatic transmission.
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi- NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless PARK.
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. 11. Odometer / Trip Odometer — If Equipped
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
by an authorized dealer. been driven.

U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of 12. Message Display Area
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer messages will display:
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator Off
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
ECO-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator On
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker mustdoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lift Gate Ajar
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood Ajar
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ LoW tirE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
HOTOIL . . . . . . Transaxle Oil Temperature Exceeds Safe
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer Threshold
must be reset at zero. CRUISE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Control On
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
switch from odometer to trip odometer, press the Trip noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
Odometer button. CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
LoCOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Coolant
To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odom- LoWASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Washer Fluid
eter to be reset then push and hold the button until the
display resets (approximately two seconds).

NOTE: The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO-on
• If your vehicle is equipped with a hood switch, in the depending on driving habits and vehicle usage.
case of hood ajar, a warning message will be displayed
LoW tirE
in either the PRNDL/Odometer display as “hood” or
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
“Hood Ajar” in the EVIC display.
display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three
• Some of the above warnings will be displayed in the cycles.
Compass Mini-Trip Computer / Electronic Vehicle
Information Center Display Area located in the instru-
HOTOIL 4
When this message is displayed there is a transaxle
ment cluster.
over-temperature condition. When this condition occurs,
Refer to ”Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) the “HOTOIL” message will be displayed in the odom-
Display— If Equipped” / ”Electronic Vehicle Informa- eter along with a chime.
tion Center (EVIC) Display — If Equipped” later in
If this message appears, stop the vehicle and run the
this section for more information.
engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in NEU-
ECO / ECO-on (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped TRAL, until the light goes off.
The ECO-on indicator will illuminate when you are
NOTE: When this message is displayed, bring the
driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to
vehicle to a stop and idle the engine until the message
modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
clears.

gASCAP 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a change indicator system is duty cycle-based, which
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the dependent upon your personal driving style.
Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Reset button to turn
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
off the message. If the problem continues, the message
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
noFUSE release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom- following procedure:
eter display area. For more information on fuses and fuse
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
locations refer to “Fuses” in Section 7.
start the engine).
CHAngE OIL
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
within 10 seconds.
indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure. to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
13. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Reset Button NOTE:
To reset a message display (gATE, gASCAP, noFUSE, • The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
CHAngE OIL, LoCOOL, LoWASH), push and hold the mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
button until the display resets (approximately two sec-
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system 4
onds).
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
14. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Malfunction
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
Indicator Light — If Equipped
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” in the
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
instrument cluster will come on when the
that caused the ESC activation.
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It
should go out with the engine running. If the 15. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
“ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continu- The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in

the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not
WARNING!
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly. A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
pants or others.
not require towing.
16. Engine Temperature Warning Light
CAUTION!
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
damage to the engine control system. It also could proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a
required. continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
to cool.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an autho-
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for required and you may experience reduced performance,
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in Section 6 an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
for more information. may require towing.
17. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light 18. Oil Pressure Warning Light 4
This light informs you of a problem with the This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The light should turn on momentarily when the engine
light will come on when the ignition is first is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
the system checked by an authorized dealer. on.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.

19. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped 22. Airbag Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog This light turns on and remains on for four
lights are on. seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
20. Seat Belt Reminder Light
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
driving, have the system inspected by an authorized
light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb
dealer as soon as possible.
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb 23. Charging System Light
check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate ing system. The light should come on when the
and the chime will sound. Refer to the Occupant Re- ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
straints section for more information. as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
21. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
vehicle is disarmed.
rized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
Procedures” in section 6 of this manual. equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
24. Low Fuel Light
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal-
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
lons (7.8 liters) this light will turn on and remain on
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
until fuel is added.
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to 4
Equipped overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
should be checked monthly, when cold and the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
low tire pressure telltale.
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
CAUTION!
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is The TPMS has been optimized for the original
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for warning have been established for the tire size
approximately one minute and then remain continuously equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. placement equipment that is not of the same size,
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the 26. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more Light — If Equipped
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS trol (ESC) is off.
to continue to function properly.

27. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Reset direction the vehicle is facing and the current radio
Button station. For more information refer to “Compass Mini-
Press the reset button to scroll through sub menus (i.e., Trip Computer” in this section.
Outside Temperature, Trip Functions: AVG Fuel
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
Economy, DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units. Press and hold
— If Equipped
the reset button for approximately two seconds to reset
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
the display shown.
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
NOTE: For more detailed operation, refer to “Compass instrument cluster. For more information refer to “Elec- 4
Mini-Trip Computer” later in this section. tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in this section.
28. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Display / COMPASS MINI-TRIP COMPUTER (CMTC) — IF
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display— EQUIPPED
If Equipped
NOTE:
Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Display — If • The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, elimi-
Equipped nating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
On vehicles equipped with Compass Mini-Trip Com-
puter (CMTC), the display provides the outside tempera- • If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler uconnect™
ture, one of eight compass headings to indicate the gps (Navigation Radio), the NAV system will provide

the compass direction, and the variance and calibra- When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
tion menus will be unavailable. The compass will messages will display:
perform accurately, based on GPS signals instead of
the Earth’s magnetic field. NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eight-point compass headings
The Compass Mini-Trip Computer is located in the are displayed (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
instrument cluster and features a driver-interactive dis- 14°F. . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature (Fahrenheit or Celsius)
play (displays information on outside temperature, com- AVG . . . . . . . . . Average Fuel Economy (U.S. or Metric)
pass direction, and trip information). DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance to Empty
ET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elapsed Time
CMTC Reset Buttons P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park Assist On/Off
CMTC Reset Button Should this wrench symbol display with the
Press the left reset button located on the instrument letter P next to it, your Park Assist System
cluster to scroll through sub menus (i.e., Trip Functions: needs servicing. Contact an authorized dealer.
AVG Fuel Economy, DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units).
To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the
ON position, then press and hold the reset button for
approximately two seconds.

CMTC Trip Odometer (ODO) / ECO (Fuel Saver The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO-ON
Indicator) — If Equipped depending on driving habits and vehicle usage.
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
Compass/Temperature Display
reset. Press and release the right button on the instrument
cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B, or to Compass Variance
ECO. Press and hold the right button while the Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
odometer/trip odometer is displayed to reset. North and Geographic North. To ensure compass accu-
Trip A
racy, the compass variance should be properly set accord- 4
ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
will be driven. When properly set, the compass will
reset.
automatically account for this difference.
Trip B
NOTE:
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
• A good calibration requires a level surface and an
reset.
environment free from large metallic objects such as
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
The ECO-ON indicator will illuminate when you are etc.
driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to
modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.

• Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as cell To Set the Variance
phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops) Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector
should be kept away from the top of the instrument lever in the PARK position. Press and hold the CMTC
panel. This is where the compass module is located reset button (for approximately ten seconds) until the
and such devices may interfere and cause false com- current variance zone number is displayed. To change the
pass readings. zone, press and release the CMTC reset button to increase
the variance one step. Repeat as necessary until the
desired variance is achieved.
NOTE: The factory default zone is 8. During program-
ming, the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to
zone 1.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manu-
ally recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the
compass:
1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in the
Compass Variance Map
PARK position.

2. Press and hold the CMTC reset button (for approxi-
mately 10 seconds) until the current variance zone num-
ber is displayed.
3. Release the CMTC reset button, then press and hold
again for approximately 10 seconds, until the direction is
displayed, with the CAL indicator on continuously in the
display.
4
4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
in one or more complete 360–degree circles, under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and large
metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns off. The
compass will now function normally. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER variety of useful information by pressing the switches
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- following:
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. • System Status display

• Vehicle information warning message displays Press and release the MENU button, and the
mode displayed will change between Compass/
• Tire Pressure Monitor System
Temperature, Trip, System Status, and Personal
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) MENU Settings.
• Compass display Press the STEP button to scroll through sub
• Outside temperature display menus (i.e., Trip Functions, Avg. Fuel Economy,
DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units).
• Trip computer functions
• Audio Modes display Steering Wheel EVIC Compass/Temp
Control Button, as it appears on the
EVIC Menu / Step Control Button, right side of the steering column.
as it appears on the left side of the
steering column.
Press and release the Compass/Temperature

button to for instant access to the Compass/
Temperature screens.

Press this button to RESET Trip Functions and • RKE Battery Low
change Personal Settings.
• LOW WASHER FLUID
• Oil Change Required
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays • Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
the following messages:
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out 4
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime, if vehicle is in
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
motion)
• Park Assist Disabled
• Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle starts
moving) • Service Park Assist System
• Hood Ajar (if equipped with hood switch) • Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not In Park
• Check TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring • Blind Spot System Off — This message is displayed
System” in Section 5 of this manual) when the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind
Spot System has been turned off.
• Turn Signal On

• Blind Spot System Not Available — This message is Oil Change Required
displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor block- indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
age, electronic interference, or other ⬙temporary⬙ con- flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds,
ditions. When this message is displayed both outside after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
rear view icons will be illuminated. If electronic inter- scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
ference is present, the BSM system will illuminate the indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the
icon only on the side of interference as long as engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
interference is present. your personal driving style.
• Service Blind Spot System — This message is dis- Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
played to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
system is permanently unavailable. The driver will position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
receive an EVIC message and the BSM display warn- release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator
ing in both mirrors will be permanently illuminated. If system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
this message is present see an authorized dealer. perform the following steps.
• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine).

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times “RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
within 10 seconds. history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
reset.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
Distance To Empty (DTE)
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
Trip Functions determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous 4
Press and release the MENU button until one of the and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC. tank level.
Press the STEP button to scroll through all the Trip NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
Computer functions. loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion. When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
Average Fuel Economy
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read

significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display. Equipped
The compass readings indicate the direction
Elapsed Time
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
compass button to display one of eight com-
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
pass readings, and the outside temperature.
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position. ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped
The ECO message will display below the outside tem-
Display Units of Measure in:
perature in the EVIC display. This message will appear
To make your selection, press and release the STEP
whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner.
button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
To Reset the Display
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
displayed. Press and release the RESET button once to
clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all
resettable functions, press and release the RESET button
a second time, within three seconds of resetting the
currently-displayed function (Reset ALL will display
during this three-second window).

Automatic Compass Calibration 3. Press the STEP button until “Calibrate Compass” is
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the displayed in the EVIC.
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
4. Press and release the RESET button to start the cali-
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
bration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
EVIC.
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or 5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” 4
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally. indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator Compass Variance
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows: North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached. differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of 2. Press and hold the compass button for approximately
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Cell Phones, Lap- two seconds.
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
3. Press the STEP button until “Compass Variance” mes-
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
sage, and the last variance zone number, displays in the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
EVIC.
4. Press and release the STEP button until the proper
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
5. Press and release the compass button to exit.
Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
message PERSONAL SETTING NOT AVAILABLE ,
followed in three seconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
Compass Variance Map
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
1. Turn the ignition switch ON. tings displays in the EVIC.

Use the Step button to display one of the following Auto UNLK On Exit
choices. When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
Language
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
When in this display you may select one of five lan-
make your selection, press and release the RESET button
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
until ON or OFF appears.
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the RESET button while in this display to select English, RKE Unlock
Spanish (Español), French (Français), Italian (Italiano), When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s 4
German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Nederlands). Then, as door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
you continue, the information will display in the selected Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
language. Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice, to unlock the passen-
Auto Door Locks
ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
To make your selection, press and release the RESET
press and release the RESET button until “Driver Door
button until ON or OFF appears.
1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.

RKE Linked To Memory Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror, When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
and radio settings will return to the memory set position have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. If when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
this feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror, and release the RESET button until 0, 30, 60, or 90
and radio settings can only return to the memory set appears.
position using the door mounted switch. Pressing the
Easy Exit Seat
RESET button when in this display will select ⬙Yes⬙ or
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
⬙No.⬙
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
Flash Lamp Lock vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will RESET button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
your selection, press and release the RESET button until
door. Refer to “Easy Entry/Exit Seat” under “Driver
ON or OFF appears.
Memory Seat” in Section 3 of this manual for more
information.

Tilt MIRR. In Reverse ILLUMIN. Approach
When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
a reverse gear, the driver’s side mirror will tilt downward and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle. tion, press and release the RESET button until “OFF,”
“30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window Blind Spot Alert
switches, radio, uconnect™ phone (if equipped), DVD There are 3 selections when operating Blind Spot Alert. 4
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), By pressing and releasing the RESET button once, the
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Blind Spot
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle Alert Lights” mode. When this mode is selected the Blind
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection, Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only
press and release the RESET button until Off, 45 sec., show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. By pressing
5 min., or 10 min. appears. and releasing the RESET button a second time “Blind
Spot Alert Lights/CHM” mode is activated. In this mode
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in
the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the
turn signal is on. When “Blind Spot Alert Off” is selected
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.

NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in Display Units of Measure In
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped)
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. can be changed between English and Metric units of
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor measure. To make your selection, press and release the
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result RESET button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears.
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Door Alert
Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System When this feature is selected the signal lamps activate
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind when power or manual sliding doors are in operation,
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE and signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or
the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The entering the vehicle.
system can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound and
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC, to make your
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
selection, press and release the RESET button. Refer to
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
“Rear Park Assist System” in Section 3 of this manual for
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with
system function and operating information.
Remote Key Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears.

Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate, When ON is selected, the system will automatically
and remain on for up to 90 seconds, when the doors are activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec- the windshield. To make your selection, press and release
tion, press and release the RESET button until OFF, the RESET button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. When
30 sec., 60 sec., or 90 sec. appears. OFF is selected, the system reverts to the standard
intermittent wiper operation.
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights AM/FM/CD/DVD RADIO (RER & RBZ) – IF
4
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To EQUIPPED
make your selection, press and release the RESET button
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to “SmartBeam™” in
of the unit’s faceplate.
Section 3.
The RBZ and RER radios contain a CD/DVD player, USB
Display ECO — If Equipped
port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius Satellite
The “ECO” message can be turned on or off. To make
Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-
for easy menu selection.
LECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Refer to your uconnect™ tunes (RBZ) or (RER) User’s
Manual located on the DVD for detailed operating in-
structions.

Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition 3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
System (VR) — If Equipped word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in the played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
details. ward is displayed.
Operating Instructions — uconnect™ phone — If 4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
Equipped the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in the uconnect™ User displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
Manual located on the DVD for further details. screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
To Manually Set the Clock
the word “Save” is displayed.
1. Turn on the radio.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clock When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
setting menu will appear on the screen. daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:

2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The Changing the Time Zone
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting. 3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
Show Time if Radio is Off
the screen. 4
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed 4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
as follows to change the current setting: selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
Clock Setting Procedure — RER Radio
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.” uconnect威 gps
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
Off” are displayed to change the current setting. the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The

satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and downward is displayed.
daylight savings information is set.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
To Manually Set the Clock the word “Save” is displayed.
1. Turn on the radio. Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the current setting:
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
2. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down- 3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
ward is displayed. the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
played to change the current setting.
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is

Show Time if Radio is Off Changing the Time Zone
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting: 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
1. Turn on the radio. 3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are 4
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
6. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.

SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio.
side of the radio faceplate.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES Radio

SEEK Buttons 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch knob to save time change.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass RW/FF
stations without stopping, until you release it. Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
TIME Button
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the 4
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
AM or FM frequencies.
and radio frequency.
TUNE Control
Clock Setting Procedure
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
SCROLL control knob. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Memory
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
treble tones.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the this station and press and release that button. If a button
sound level from the right or left side speakers. is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
the front and rear speakers. repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and

SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. MP3 Audio Play
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
NOTE:
pressing the pushbutton twice.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding position to operate the radio.
button number will display.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
Buttons 1 - 6 recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact 4
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
stations).
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
DISC Button Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
AM/FM modes to Disc modes. the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
CAUTION! 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
CD player mechanism. NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
away and jam the player mechanism. SEEK Button
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
a second CD if one is already loaded. CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
can cause damage to the player. the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.

TIME Button Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Press this button to change the display from a large CD Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
RW/FF The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD file recording media and formats are limited. When
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) tions.
button works in a similar manner. 4
Supported Media (Disc Types)
AM/FM Button The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button) Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activateThe medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on theLevel 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
change of pace. ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
domly selected track.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems: Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255 Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
display.) designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension) following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
character extension) use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.

MPEG Sampling Fre- Playback of MP3 Files

Bit Rate (kbps) When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
Specification quency (kHz)
320, 256, 224, 192, radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
MPEG-1 Audio 160, 128, 112, 96, contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
48, 44.1, 32 time to start playing the MP3 files.
Layer 3 80, 64, 56, 48, 40,
32
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
160, 128, 144, 112, by the following:
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 4
40, 32, 24, 16, 8 • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
supported by the radios. to load than non-multisession discs
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
supported. increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREO
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an SIRIUS RADIO
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
side of the radio faceplate.
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
RES/RSC Radio

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
position to operate the radio.
stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
Refer to “Voice Recognition (VR)” in the uconnect™ User
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio. 4
Voice Recognition Button uconnect™ phone — If
Electronic Volume Control
Equipped
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Recognition (VR)” in the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
volume and to the left decreases it.
details.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
set at the same volume level as last played.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
SEEK Buttons UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch

Phone Button uconnect™ phone — If Equipped 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in the will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
details.
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not knob to save time change.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
TIME Button
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
and radio frequency.
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
Clock Setting Procedure starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
procedure, starting at Step 2.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.

INFO Button Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). mid-range tones.
RW/FF Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either treble tones. 4
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
TUNE Control time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones. the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
exit setting tone, balance, and fade. College College
MUSIC TYPE Button Country Country
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type Foreign Language Language
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button Information Inform
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five Jazz Jazz
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
News News
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information. Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following Personality Persnlty
format types:
Public Public
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display Rhythm and Blues R&B
No program type or Religious Music Rel Musc
None
undefined
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Rock Rock
Classical Classicl
Soft Soft
Classic Rock Cls Rock
Soft Rock Soft Rck

Program Type 16-Digit Character Display SETUP Button

Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
Sports Sports
Talk Talk • Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
Top 40 Top 40 you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
Weather Weather TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust 4
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
station with the same selected Music Type name. The control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
Music Type function only operates when in the FM to save time change.
mode.
AM/FM Button
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station. SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display

window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this Buttons 1 - 6
station and press and release that button. If a button is These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/ commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not stations).
be stored into pushbutton memory.
DISC/AUX Button
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
MP3 Audio Play
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. NOTE:
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by • The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
pressing the pushbutton twice. position to operate the radio.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
button number will display. recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the away and jam the player mechanism.
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than • RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be a second CD if one is already loaded.
ejected before a new disc can be loaded. • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they 4
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio can cause damage to the player.
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
show the track number, and index time in minutes and Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
CD player mechanism. the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
(Continued) A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on AM/FM Button
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped). Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SEEK Button SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of change of pace.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
domly selected track.
CD and MP3 modes.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
TIME Button
dom Play.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
RW/FF
file recording media and formats are limited. When
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
tions.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.

Supported Media (Disc Types) a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
character extension) 4
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. character extension)
The radio uses the following limits for file systems: Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255 Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign

Supported MP3 File Formats MPEG Specifi- Sampling Fre-
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten- Bit Rate (kbps)
cation quency (kHz)
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 320, 256, 224, 192,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is MPEG-1 Audio 160, 128, 112, 96,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will 48, 44.1, 32
Layer 3 80, 64, 56, 48, 40,
not play the file. 32
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to 160, 128, 144, 112,
MPEG-2 Audio
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the 24, 22.05, 16 96, 80, 64, 56, 48,
Layer 3
40, 32, 24, 16, 8
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
VBR bit rates. supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.

Playback of MP3 Files LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
time to start playing the MP3 files. folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
by the following:
playable files). 4
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
before writing to the disc.

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display. Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
ignition is OFF).
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an Operating Instructions - uconnect™ phone
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s (If Equipped)
audio system to amplify the source and play through the Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in the uconnect™ User
vehicle speakers. Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil- Operating Instructions - uconnect™ studios
iary device if the AUX jack is connected. (Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect™ studios (Satellite Radio)” in the
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
details.
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF
down. EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with uconnect™. For sales code

RER, REN, REP, REW or REZ touch-screen radio UCI • Connecting an iPod威 to the AUX port located in the
feature, refer to the separate RER, REN or REZ User’s radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
Manual. UCI is available only if equipped as an option feature to control the connected device.
with these radios.
Connecting The iPod姞
This feature allows you to plug an iPod威 into the Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod威 to
vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector, using the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located in
the provided interface cable. the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the
iPod威 is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCI 4
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and
system (iPod威 may take a few seconds to connect), the
iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may not
iPod威 starts charging and is ready for use by pressing
fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s
radio switches, as described below.
website for software updates.
NOTE:
NOTE:
• You may have to remove the connector pin protection
• If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod威 to this
cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to connect-
port does not play the media. For playing an iPod威,
ing the cable.
use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glove
compartment on some vehicles).

• If the iPod威 battery is completely discharged, it may Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, iPod威 audio tracks (if
not communicate with the UCI system until a mini- available from iPod威) start playing over the vehicle’s
mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod威 connected audio system.
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.
Play Mode
Using This Feature When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威 automatically
By using the provided connection cable to connect an starts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use the
iPod威 to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port: following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the
iPod威 and display data:
• The iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, • Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
etc.) information on the radio display. previous track.
• The iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to • Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents. playing a track, skips to the next track.
• The iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI • Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
connector (if supported by the specific iPod威 device) click, during the first two seconds of the track, will
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this
Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons
button at any other time in the track, will jump to
To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
the beginning of the current track.
iPod威, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.

• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
button long enough will take you to the beginning for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
of the current track. to the next screen of data for that track. Once you have
seen all screens, the last INFO button press will take
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
you back to the play mode screen on the radio.
holding the FF >> button.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod威
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will 4
mode to repeat the current playing track.
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds. • Press the SCAN button to use iPod威 scan mode, which
will play the first five seconds of each track in the
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
current list and then forward to the next song. To stop
previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is
SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when
pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.
jump to the previous track in the list; if you press this
During Scan mode, you can also press the << SEEK
button at any other time in the track, it will jump to the
and SEEK >> buttons to select the previous and next
beginning of the track. If you press the SEEK >>
tracks.
button during play mode, it will jump to the next track
in the list. • RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and

Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威. If the RND icon is • During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is “wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
ON. bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described • In List mode, the radio PRESET Buttons are used as
below, takes you to List mode. List mode enables you to shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威.
scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod威.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
• Preset 2 – Artists
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying • Preset 4 – Genres
the track detail on the radio display. Once you have
• Preset 5 - Audiobooks
the track to be played highlighted on the radio
display, press the TUNE control knob to select and • Preset 6 – Podcasts
start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating
the second line.
the information on the radio display.

• To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
CAUTION!
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode. • Leaving the iPod威 (or any supported device) any-
where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
alter the operation or damage the device. Follow
level menu of the iPod威. Turn the TUNE control knob
the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
to list the top-menu item you wish to select and press
the TUNE control knob. This will display the next • Placing items on the iPod威, or connections to the
sub-menu list item on the iPod威 then you can follow iPod威 in the vehicle, can cause damage to the 4
the same steps to go to the desired track in that list. device and/or to the connectors.
Not all iPod威 sub-menu levels are available on this
system. WARNING!
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 while driving.
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your Failure to follow this warning could result in an
iPod威. accident.

uconnect™ studios (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
EQUIPPED (REN/RER/RBZ/RES RADIOS ONLY) visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast- .siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Number (ESN/SID)
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
Please have the following information available when
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
calling:
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
Number (ESN/SID).
limited coverage in Alaska.
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
ESN/SID Access With RES Radios
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
come kit that contains general information, including
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the

Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
the radio to exit this screen. on or above the antenna.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER/RBZ Radios Reception Quality
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
faceplate. following reasons:
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen. • The vehicle is parked in an underground parking 4
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display. structure or under a physical obstacle.
Selecting uconnect™ studios (Satellite) Mode • Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A form of short audio mutes.
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
mode.
cause intermittent reception.
Satellite Antenna
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
cause signal blockage.
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as

Operating Instructions - uconnect™ studios INFO Button
(Satellite) Mode Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
position to operate the radio.
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
SEEK Buttons Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next to normal display).
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
RW/FF
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
direction of the arrows.
without stopping until you release it.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
SCAN Button
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.

MUSIC TYPE Button SETUP Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button following items:
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
lected.
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music Sirius subscription.
type. 4
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
channel with the same selected Music Type name. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
and press and release that button. If a button is not
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by uconnect™ studios (SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™) —
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press IF EQUIPPED
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This technology to provide streaming video. The subscription
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. SIRIUS Back-
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 seat TV™ offers three video channels for family enter-
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton tainment, directly from its satellites and broadcasting
twice. studios.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding NOTE: SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii or
button number will display. Canada and has limited coverage in Alaska.
Buttons 1 - 6 Refer to your Video Entertainment System (VES)™, RER
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you Navigation, RBZ Multimedia or REN Multimedia User
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations). Manuals for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions - uconnect™ phone
(If Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in the uconnect™ User

VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF • Ten different medias to choose from in each screen
EQUIPPED (AM, FM, Sirius Radio, Sirius Backseat TV™, DVD1,
The optional Video Entertainment System (VES)™ is DVD2, Hard Disc Drive (HDD), AUX in radio, AUX1,
available with: AUX2)
• One or two video screens The LCD screen(s) are located in the overhead compart-
• Third row swivel screen — If Equipped ment console.
• Additional single-disc DVD player with two-screen 4

system
• Battery-powered two-channel remote control
• Two remote headphones
• Integrated remote storage in either screen location
• Three different medias can be played simultaneously
(Cabin speakers and Headphone Channels 1 and 2)
• Easy menu-driven functions on touch-screen radios
• Video and audio input jacks available in rear seating
area Overhead Video Screens

REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
VES™ Remote Control Location

NOTE: Refer to the “uconnect™ studios” section of
uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further Remote Sound System Controls
details. (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine
o’clock positions.

The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the The button located in the center of the left-hand switch
center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will
CD Player
decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or Tape to CD
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second 4
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different, after the current track begins to play.
depending on which mode you are in.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
The following describes the left-hand rocker switch op- second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
eration in each mode.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no
Radio Operation function in this mode.
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.

CD/DVD MAINTENANCE NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
precautions: coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc. by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays. antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing. turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
too high. throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System — If Front Blower Control
Equipped There are four blower speeds. Use this
The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain control to regulate the amount of air
a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These forced through the system in any
comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior mode you select. The blower speed
conditions. increases as you move the control
clockwise from the off position.
4
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Manual Temperature Control

Temperature Control Mode Control (Air Direction)
Use this control to regulate the tem- Mode control allows you to choose
perature of the air inside the passenger from several selections of air distribu-
compartment. Rotating the knob coun- tion. You can select either a primary
terclockwise, from top center into the mode, as identified by the symbols, or
blue area indicates cooler tempera- a blend of two of these modes. The
tures. Rotating the knob clockwise, closer the control is to a particular
into the red area, indicates warmer mode, the more air distribution you
temperatures. receive from that mode.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems Panel Mode
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con- Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumu- panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction,
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray and turned on or off to control airflow.
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
seat passengers.

Bi-Level Mode Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any maximum blower and temperature settings for best
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the windshield and side window defrosting.
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the
comfort during sunny but cool conditions. A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to 4
Floor Mode help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a these modes only when necessary.
small amount through the defrost and side window Recirculation Control
demist outlets. Press this button to choose between outside air
Mix Mode intake or recirculation of the air inside the
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side vehicle. A lamp will illuminate when you are in
window demist outlets. This setting works best in RECIRCULATION mode. Only use the RECIR-
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at CULATION mode to temporarily block out any outside
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly
comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield. upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.

NOTE: • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
• If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the ing the mode control selection.
system is in MIX, DEFROST, or FLOOR mode the
Economy Mode
RECIRCULATION LED indicator will flash 3 times
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
and then turn off to indicate RECIRCULATION mode
turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
is not allowed.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired
• Continuous use of the RECIRCULATION mode may temperature.
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
Air Conditioning Operation
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Push on this button to engage the Air
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the RECIRCULA- Conditioning (A/C). A light will illu-
TION mode will cause windows to fog on the inside minate when the A/C System is en-
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For gaged.
maximum defogging, select the outside air position.
• In order to prevent fogging, when the RECIRCULA-
TION button is pressed and the mode control is set to
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
PANEL, the A/C will engage automatically.
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.

Max A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and RECIRCULA-
TION mode buttons at the same time.
Three-Zone Temperature Control — If Equipped
With the Three-Zone Temperature Control System, each
front seat occupant can independently control the Heat-
ing, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning operations coming
from the outlets on their side of the vehicle. 4
Front Upper Three Zone Temperature Control

1 – Left Temperature 7 – Right Temperature
2 – PANEL 8 – Rear DEFROST
3 – BI-LEVEL 9 – RECIRCULATION
4 – Front Blower 10 – Front DEFROST
5 – FLOOR 11 – Air Conditioning (A/C)
6 – MIX

The Three-Zone Temperature Control bottom panel con- The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
trols rear Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning climate control unit located on the instrument panel.
operations.
The Three-Zone Temperature Control bottom panel has
five positions; off, rear, and a range of blower speeds.
Only when the primary control for the rear blower is in
the rear (RR) position do the second row seat occupants
have control of the rear blower speed.
Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped
The Rear Manual Climate Control system has floor air
outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door, and
overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position.
The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and
upper outlets.
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear
Front Lower Three-Zone Temperature Control Features
seat passengers are located in the headliner, near the
1 – Left Heated Seat 3 – Rear Temperature
2 – Rear Blower 4 – Right Heated Seat
center of the vehicle.

Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the
RR position do the second row seat occupants have
control of the rear blower speed.
The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead
console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds.
This allows the second row seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
4
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control
system through an intake grille, located in the pas-
Rear Manual Climate Controls senger side trim panel behind the third row seats.
1 – Rear Blower 3 – Rear Climate Control Lock The heater outlets are located in the passenger side
2 – Rear Temperature 4 – Rear MODE trim panel, just behind the sliding door. Do not block
Rear Blower Control or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front heater outlets. The electrical system could overload,
climate control unit, located on the instrument panel. causing damage to the blower motor.

Rear Temperature Control control is in FLOOR, DEFROST, or MIX modes, airflow
When the blower knob on the front climate control unit is will be directed out of the rear floor outlets.
set to any position other than the rear temperature
Rear Mode Control
settings will be controlled by the rear temperature control
knob on the front climate control unit. The rear mode Headliner Mode
selection RR, allows the settings to be controlled by the Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
rear mode control knob. these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
side will shut off the airflow.
rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for
cold air, and clockwise for heated air. Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
floor outlets.
lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated, and
the rear overhead adjustments are inoperable. NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit opera-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
tion. Rear PANEL mode is automatically selected when
the front control is in the PANEL mode. When the front Floor Mode
unit is in BI-LEVEL mode, airflow will be emitted from Air comes from the floor outlets.
both the upper and lower rear outlets. When the front

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
• Front Three-Zone ATC allows both driver and front
passenger seat occupant, and rear seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.
• Occupants in the vehicle select AUTO mode operation
by a button press on the right rotary knob and a
comfort temperature setting using rotary knobs on the
4
control unit.
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
• SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones, Front Upper ATC Panel
allowing one comfort setting for the cabin, if desired. 1 - System On/Off 9 - Air Conditioning (A/C) On/Off
2 - Blower Indicator 10 - AUTO Mode / Blower
The Three-Zone ATC System automatically maintains the 3 - Left Front Temperature 11 - Front MODE
interior comfort level desired by the driver and all passen- 4 - Rear Blower / 12 - RECIRCULATE
Temperature / Mode
gers. The system automatically adjusts the air temperature, 5 - SYNC Indicator 13 - Front DEFROST
the airflow volume, amount of outside air recirculation and 6 - A/C Indicator 14 - Front Blower Speed
7 - Right Front 15 - SYNC
the airflow direction. This maintains a comfortable tem- Temperature
8 - Front MODE Indicator
perature, even under changing conditions.

Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO button on the Front Upper ATC Panel
and the word AUTO will illuminate in the front ATC
display, along with three temperatures for driver, front
passenger, and rear seats. The system will then automati-
cally regulate the amount of airflow.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver, front passen-
ger, and rear seat rotary temperature knobs. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve
and automatically maintain that comfort level.
Front Lower ATC Panel
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
1 - Rear Blower Speed 4 - Rear ATC Lock
2 - Rear Temperature / Rear 5 - Rear DEFROST not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
System On/Off the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
3 - Rear MODE function automatically.

NOTE: Manual Operation
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for This system offers a full complement of manual override
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide be turned off when the system is being used in the
comfort as quickly as possible. manual mode.
• The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in” from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec- the temperature doors will continue to operate automati- 4
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer- cally.
Programmable Features” in this Section.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic pressing the Front Upper ATC Panel blower rocker
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain button. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until
on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the front additional speeds are selected. This allows the front
ATC display, until the engine warms up. The fan will occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the
engage immediately if the DEFROST mode is selected, or vehicle and cancel the AUTO mode.
by pressing the Front Upper ATC Panel blower rocker
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
button and setting the fan to any fixed blower speed.
by selecting one of the following positions.

Panel Mode Floor Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction, air is directed through the defrost and side window
and turned on or off to control airflow. demister outlets.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center Mix Mode
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
seat passengers. demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfort-
Bi-Level Mode
able, while keeping the windshield clear.
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost outlets. A slight amount of air is Defrost Mode
also directed through the side window demister outlets. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with maxi-
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
shield and side window defrosting.
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.

The SNOWFLAKE mode, or A/C button, allows Recirculation Control
the operator to manually activate or deactivate the When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
air conditioning system. When in SNOWFLAKE high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
mode, and the ATC display is on cool, dehumidified air you may wish to recirculate interior air by
flows through the air outlets. If ECONOMY mode is pressing the RECIRCULATION mode control
desired, press the SNOWFLAKE button to turn off the button. RECIRCULATION mode should only be used
SNOWFLAKE mode in the ATC display, and deactivate temporarily. The recirculation symbol will illuminate in
the A/C system. the display when this button is selected. Push the button 4
a second time to turn off the RECIRCULATION mode
NOTE:
LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.
• If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the SNOW-
FLAKE can be turned off, but the A/C system shall NOTE: In cold weather, use of the RECIRCULATION
remain active to prevent fogging of the windows. mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The RE-
CIRCULATION mode is not allowed in the FLOOR, MIX
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
and DEFROST modes to improve window clearing op-
select DEFROST mode and increase blower speed.
eration. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if
these modes are selected.

Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The Rear ATC System has floor air outlets at the rear of
the right side sliding door, and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
The REAR SYSTEM control for the Rear ATC System is on
the front lower ATC panel located on the instrument panel.
Pressing the REAR LOCK button for the Rear ATC System
from the front lower ATC panel, illuminates a LOCK
symbol in the rear display. The rear temperature and air Rear ATC Control Features
source are controlled from the front lower ATC panel. 1 - Blower Speed 3 - Rear ATC Lock
2 - Rear Temperature 4 - Rear MODE
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the REAR LOCK button is turned off. 1. Press the REAR LOCK button on the front lower ATC
panel. This turns off the REAR LOCK icon in the rear
The Rear ATC System is located in the headliner, near the temperature knob.
center of the vehicle.

2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec-
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs. tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-
Programmable Features” in this Section.
3. ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO. Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. 4
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
CAUTION!
system to function automatically.
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
NOTE:
Control System through an intake grille, located in
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
the passenger side trim panel behind the third row
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
seats. The heater outlets are located in the passenger
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
side trim panel, just behind the sliding door. Do not
comfort as quickly as possible.
block or place objects directly in front of the inlet
• The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric grille or heater outlets. The electrical system could
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in” overload causing damage to the blower motor.

Rear Temperature Control Bi-Level Mode
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower floor outlets.
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the tempera-
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
ture. The REAR temperature settings are displayed in the
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
front upper ATC panel.
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
Floor Mode
LOCK symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated
Air comes from the floor outlets.
and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
Rear Mode Control
Summer Operation
Auto Mode The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
The rear system automatically maintains the correct mode must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
and comfort level desired by the rear seat occupants. to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
Headliner Mode against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one manual for proper coolant selection.
side will shut off the airflow.

Winter Operation Window Fogging
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor- Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function- and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen- DEFROST or MIX mode and increase the front blower
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance speed. Do not use the RECIRCULATION mode without
Procedures” in section 7 of this manual for proper coolant A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
selection. Use of the air RECIRCULATION mode during
Outside Air Intake
Winter months is not recommended, because it may
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the 4
cause window fogging.
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
Vacation/Storage collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service enter the plenum they could plug the water drains. In
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in slush and snow.
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.

Operating Tips A/C Air Filter— If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Con-
trol (ATC), the climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Refer to “Air Conditioning” in Sec-
tion 7 of this manual for filter replacement instructions.

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 ▫ Brake/Transaxle Interlock System . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 ▫ Four-Speed Or Six-Speed Automatic
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 5
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below ⫺20°F Or –29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ If The Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 308 䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
䡵 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

304 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 334
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . 324 䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 347
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 325 䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 348
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 325 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 ▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 327 䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 ▫ 3.3L And 3.8L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 ▫ 4.0L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 333 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

STARTING AND OPERATING 305
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 ▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 358 ▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 ▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 367
䡵 Flexible Fuel (3.3L Engines Only) — 䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 5
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
䡵 Recreational Towing
Vehicles E-85 And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . 364
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

STARTING PROCEDURES Automatic Transaxle
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if position before you can start the engine. Press the brake
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat pedal before shifting into any driving gear.
belts.
Normal Starting
WARNING! 1. Do not press the accelerator.
• Never leave unattended children alone in a ve- 2. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the
hicle. Leaving children in a vehicle is dangerous ignition switch to the START position and release it as
for a number of reasons. A child or others could be soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key continue to run, and it will disengage automatically
fob in the ignition. A child could operate power when the engine is running.
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
3. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage
• Do not leave animals or children inside parked automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may ignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds,
cause serious injury or death. then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure (Steps 1–3
above).

NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transaxle shift
interlocking system. The brake pedal must be pressed
to shift out of PARK. • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or –29°C) transaxle cannot be started this way. Unburned
Follow the same instructions in the “Normal Starting” fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
procedure. the engine has started, ignite and damage the
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of converter and vehicle.
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail- • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended. cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster 5
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
If The Engine Fails To Start of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in Section 6 of this manual.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to “Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
causing serious personal injury. there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
(Continued)

After Starting
CAUTION!
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
To prevent damage to the starter, DO NOT crank the warms up.
engine for more than 15–second intervals at one time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the electrical cord
have enough power to continue running when the key to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
fob is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the grounded, three-wire extension cord.
accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is the driver’s side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap
running smoothly. that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15– Module.
second intervals of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should WARNING!
be repeated. Remember to disconnect the electrical cord before
driving. Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord
could cause electrocution.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
WARNING!
CAUTION! It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
precautions are not observed:
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
• Move the shift lever into PARK only after the
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
• Do not move the shift lever from REVERSE, engine is idling normally and when your foot is
PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when firmly on the brake pedal. 5
the engine is above idle speed.
• Before moving the shift lever into any gear, make Key Ignition Park Interlock
sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal down prior to rotating the key fob to the LOCK position. The
while shifting out of PARK. key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the
ignition switch is in the LOCK position and once re-
moved the shift lever is locked in PARK.

Brake/Transaxle Interlock System This system prevents the key fob from being removed
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift unless the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents moving
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the the shift lever out of PARK, unless the key fob is in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK ACC/ON position, and the brake pedal is pressed.
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
position, the ignition switch must be turned to any other
key fob in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this
switch position (ACC, ON, or START) (engine running or
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
and stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System obtain service.
For electrical system malfunctions, there is an override
Four-Speed or Six-Speed Automatic Transaxle
for the interlock system. In order to override this system,
remove the cover located to the top right of the shift lever NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-10°F (-23°C)
in the instrument panel. The override can be activated by and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
pressing the white-colored tab, which can be accessed briefly limited to only second gear operation. Normal
through the hole in the instrument panel. While the operation will resume once the transmission temperature
override is pressed, the shift lever can be moved out of has risen to a suitable level.
the PARK position without pressing the brake pedal.
After operation, return the cover to its original position.

The electronically-controlled transaxle provides a precise PARK
shift schedule. The transaxle electronics are self- This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle transaxle. The engine can be started in this gear. Never
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
(kilometers). gear.
The transaxle has only PRND shift positions. Downshifts When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
are carried out by an Electronic Range Select (ERS) by PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
moving the lever—/ + while in the DRIVE position, the
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
instrument cluster will display transaxle gear selection as 5
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 for six-speed, and 4, 3, 2, 1 for four-speed
the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it
transaxles.
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
Gear Ranges precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
Do not race the engine when moving the shift lever from downhill grade, and away from the curb on an uphill
PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range. grade.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that
WARNING!
you have placed the shift lever into the PARK position:
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
• When moving the shift lever into PARK, press the
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
button on the shift lever and firmly move the lever all
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
the way forward until it stops.
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure • Look at the shift indicator window on the console to
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, ensure the shift lever is in the PARK position.
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is • When engaged in PARK, you will not be able to move
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should the shift lever rearward without pressing the shift
always move the shift lever into PARK, remove the lever button.
key fob from the ignition, and apply the parking
brake. Once the key fob is removed from the CAUTION!
ignition, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave turn the ignition switch from OFF to ACC/ON so the
unattended children or pets inside a vehicle. steering wheel and shift lever are released. Other-
wise, damage to the steering column or shift lever
could result.

REVERSE DRIVE — Six-Speed Transaxle
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift intoThis range should be used for most city and highway
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
stop. and best fuel economy. However, use the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) mode by moving the lever — / + and
NEUTRAL
select the “5” range when frequent transaxle shifting
This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro-
occurs while using the DRIVE range, such as when
longed periods with engine running. Engine may be
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions,
started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
(i.e., in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds or
leave the vehicle.
while towing heavy trailers). Under these conditions, 5
using the “5” range will improve performance and
WARNING!
extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the heat buildup.
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
DRIVE — Four-Speed Transaxle
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
This range should be used for most city and highway
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
vehicle and have an accident.
and best fuel economy. However, select the “3” range
when frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the
DRIVE range, such as when operating the vehicle under

heavy loading conditions, (i.e., in hilly terrain, traveling the transaxle into third gear, the transaxle will never shift
into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers). above third gear, but can shift down into second or first
Under these conditions, using the “3” range will improve gear automatically, when needed.
performance and extend transaxle life by reducing exces-
Switching from ERS to DRIVE can be done at any vehicle
sive shifting and heat buildup.
speed. To shift from DRIVE mode to ERS mode, move the
shift lever to the left (-) once. The current gear will be
CAUTION!
maintained as the top gear. To disable ERS, simply press
If the transaxle operating temperature exceeds ac- and hold the shift lever to the right (+) until “D” is
ceptable limits, the vehicle computer will override displayed in the instrument cluster odometer.
DRIVE and select “5” range (on six-speed transaxles)
or “3” range (on four-speed transaxles) by changing WARNING!
shift points. This is done to prevent transaxle damage
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
due to overheating.
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
or personal injury.
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows
you to move the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) when
the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, this allows the
selection of the desired top gear. For example, if you shift

Odometer 1 2 3 4 5 6 D Reset Mode - Electronic Transaxle

Screen The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal
Display conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
Actual 1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6 damage, the transaxle automatically shifts into second
Gear(s) gear (third gear for six-speed). The transaxle remains in
Allowed second gear (third gear for six-speed) despite the forward
(Six-Speed gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
Transaxle) continue to operate. This Reset feature allows the vehicle
Actual 1 1-2 1-3 1-4 N/A N/A 1–4 to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
Gear(s) damaging the transaxle. 5
Allowed
(Four-Speed In the event of a momentary problem, the transaxle can
Transaxle) be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the 1. Stop the vehicle.
shift lever to the left (-). The transaxle will shift to the 2. Shift into PARK.
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Restart the engine.

5. Shift into the desired gear range and resume driving.
WARNING!
NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, it is recom-
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
mended that you visit an authorized dealer at your
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
earliest possible convenience.
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
If the transaxle cannot be reset, authorized dealer service and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
is required. carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration Traction
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip- When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati- layer of water to build up between the tire and road
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
(driving) wheels. ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.

2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Flowing/Rising Water
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
WARNING!
become visible.
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
stop. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
DRIVING THROUGH WATER warning may result in injuries that are serious or
5
Driving through water more than a few inches/ fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.


• Always check the depth of the standing water • Driving through standing water may cause dam-
before driving through it. Never drive through age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. transmission/transaxle, axle, etc.) for signs of con-
• Determine the condition of the road or the path tamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in appearance) after driving through standing water.
the way before driving through the standing wa- Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid
ter. appears contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
through standing water. This will minimize wave
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
effects.
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
(Continued) internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

POWER STEERING
WARNING!
The standard power steering system will give you good
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water. steering capability if power assist is lost.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop- still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. parking maneuvers. 5
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you NOTE:
stranded. • Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your there is a problem with the power steering system.
passengers, and others around you. • Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering

system. This noise should be considered normal, and it checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
does not in any way damage the steering system. apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
WARNING! rized dealer.
Continued operation with reduced power steering CAUTION!
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible. Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
CAUTION!
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering WARNING!
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
occur. with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
Power Steering Fluid Check not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined power steering fluid.
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in Section 7 for the correct fluid type.
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will turn on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is 5
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking Parking Brake
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and
PARK position. To release the parking brake, press the the shift lever is in the PARK position. When parking on
emergency brake pedal a second time and let your foot a hill, you should apply the parking brake before placing
up as you feel the brake disengage. the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK.

When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
WARNING!
curb on a downhill grade, and away from the curb on an
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav- uphill grade.
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transaxle in
the driver is not in the vehicle.
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
before driving. Failure to do so can lead to brake vehicle stability and brake performance under most
problems due to excessive heating of the rear braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
brakes. computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a surfaces.
number of reasons. A child or others could be
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
fob in the ignition. A child could operate power
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle
debris, or panic stops.

You may experience the following when the brake system
WARNING!
goes into anti-lock:
• The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisti-
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
cated electronic equipment that may be susceptible
short time after the stop)
to interference caused by improperly installed, or
• A clicking sound of solenoid valves high output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock
• Brake pedal pulsations
braking capability. Installation of such equipment
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end should be performed by qualified professionals.
of the stop • Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish 5
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
(Continued)

come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System cannot prevent acci-
dents, including those resulting from excessive If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
speed in turns, following another vehicle too comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. service is required. However, the conventional brake
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous Warning Light” is not on.
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
or the safety of others. system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb
accurate signals for the computer. repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” moni- Brake Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic
tors the anti-lock brake system. The light will

Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function- functions similarly to a limited-slip differential, and
ing. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
Consult with your authorized dealer service center as on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
soon as possible. system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic the ESC is in the “Partial Off” mode.
brake control system that includes the Traction Control
System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS) and Electronic The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” (in the instru-
Stability Control (ESC). These systems complement the ment cluster) will start to flash as soon as the tires lose 5
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by optimizing the vehicle traction and the wheels begin to spin. This indicates that
braking capability during emergency braking maneu- the TCS is active. If the indicator light flashes during
vers. acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
Traction Control System (TCS) driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount switch off the ESC or TCS.
of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin
is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping
wheel(s) and engine power is reduced, to provide en-
hanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS

application, and then applies optimum pressure to the
WARNING!
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
• The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys- complements the ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the traction afforded. the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
• The TCS cannot prevent accidents, including those during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydro- pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle must WARNING!
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous • The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
or the safety of others. the traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize (Continued)
the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency brak-
ing maneuvers. The system detects an emergency brak-
ing situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
• The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan- priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
ing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can understeer condition.
prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous appropriate for the steering wheel position.
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than 5
or the safety of others. appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) WARNING!

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances direc-
tional control and stability of the vehicle under various • The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer prevailing road conditions.
condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the (Continued)
vehicle maintain the desired path.

several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
• ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the
accidents. instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose
• The capabilities of an ESC-equipped vehicle must traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety active. If the “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to
or the safety of others. flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
ESC Malfunction Indicator Light speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” in the NOTE:
instrument cluster will come on when the • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Malfunc-
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It tion Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time
should go out with the engine running. If the the ignition switch is turned ON.
“ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after will be ON even if it was turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC,
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver section, has been disabled and the “ESP Off Indicator
that caused the ESC activation. Light” will be illuminated. When in the “Partial Off”
mode, ESC will operate without engine torque manage-
ESC Operating Modes
ment. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in
The “ESC Off” switch is located in the center
deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel
switch bank, next to the hazard flasher switch.
spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain
traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the
ESC On
“ESC Off” switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” 5
mode of operation.
This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC on
two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
should be used for most driving situations. ESC should gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below. mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situa-
tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
ESC Partial Off
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
Off” switch.
the vehicle is in motion.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
Tire Markings
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan- 4 — Maximum Load
dards Code (TIN) ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and • Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
Temperature Grades spares designed for temporary emergency use only.

Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa- standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M. into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
5
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the side of the tire.
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use 5
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Loading and Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about
Tire Placard Location the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed 2) total weight your vehicle can carry
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Placard 4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
Tire and Loading Information Placard

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and 5
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
the weight referenced here.
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE:
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely • The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
calculated in Step 4. of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. • For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).


Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
cause accidents.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
overload them.
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
areas are affected by improper tire pressure. • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)

Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve- driver’s side “B” Pillar.
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left. The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted, and
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- the tires inspected for signs of wear or visible damage, at
mended cold tire inflation pressure. least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge
to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
Economy when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat- properly inflated, even when they are under-inflated. 5
terns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier CAUTION!
tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases tire rolling After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
resistance and results in higher fuel consumption. ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always Example: If garage temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature is 32°F (0°C), then the cold tire
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire outside temperature condition.
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
Tire Pressures for High-Speed Operation
temperature changes.
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
the Winter. important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original-equipment information, or an
authorized tire dealer, for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
WARNING!
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
High-speed driving, with your vehicle at or above authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
maximum load, is dangerous. The added strain on
Compact Spare Tire
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
75 mph (120 km/h).
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
Radial-Ply Tires 5
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.

WARNING! CAUTION!
• Temporary-use spare tires are for emergency use Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
only. With these tires, do not drive faster than your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
50 mph (80 km/h). compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
• Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread life. result.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica-
tors, the temporary use spare tire needs to be Tire Spinning
replaced. When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
• Be sure to follow the warnings that apply to your spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h),
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire or for more than 30 seconds continuously, without stop-
failure and loss of vehicle control. ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in Section 6 of this
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a manual for additional information.
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!
• Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gen-
erated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone.
• Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h), or for more than 30 seconds
continuously, when you are stuck; and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the 5
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators 1 — Worn Tire

Tread wear indicators are in the original-equipment tires 2 — New Tire
to help you in determining when your tires should be These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
replaced. grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

Tire Life Replacement Tires
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
factors, including, but not limited to: characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
• Driving style
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
• Tire pressure lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Please see “Tread Wear
• Distance driven
Indicators” and “Tire and Loading Information” placard
for the size designation of your tire. The service descrip-
WARNING!
tion and load identification will be found on the original-
The tires and the spare tire should be replaced after equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent replacement
six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. your vehicle. We recommend that you contact your
You could lose control and have an accident resulting original-equipment manufacturer, or an authorized tire
in serious injury or death. dealer, with any questions you may have on tire specifi-
cations or capability.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus- failure and loss of vehicle control.
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and CAUTION!
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen- Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
sion components. You could lose control and have may result in false speedometer and odometer read- 5
an accident resulting in serious injury or death. ings.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle. TIRE CHAINS
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
capacity, than what was originally equipped on SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
could result in tire overloading and failure. You manufacturer.
could lose control and have an accident. NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
(Continued)


To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the • Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as
following precautions: possible and then retighten after driving about
• Use chains on P225/65R16 tires only. P225/65R17 0.5 mile (0.8 km).
tires do not provide adequate clearance. • Do not drive for prolonged periods of time on dry
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires pavement.
and other suspension components, it is important • Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
that only chains in good condition are used. Bro- on the method of installation, operating speed,
ken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the and conditions for use. Always use the lower
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggested operating speed of the chain manufac-
indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged turer, if different from the speed recommended by
parts of the chain before further use. the vehicle manufacturer.
• Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h).
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if the
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
different maximum speeds. This notice applies to all
(Continued) chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial)
chains.

SNOW TIRES TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
during Winter. Standard tires are of the all-season type different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
designation on the tire sidewall. unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
safety and handling of your vehicle. aggressive tread designs such as those on All-Season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain 5
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
smooth, quiet ride.
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.

The suggested rotation method is shown in the following found on the tire placard located on the driver’s-side
diagram. B-pillar.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
to the “Tires – General Information” in this section for
information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment
for this increased pressure.
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
based on the cold inflation tire pressure requirements threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire Warning Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended “TPMS Warning Light” will still be on. In this situation,
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure the “TPMS Warning Light” will turn off only after the
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure cold tire pressure value.
in order for the “TPMS Warning Lamp” to be turned off.
The system will automatically update and the “TPMS CAUTION!
Warning Lamp” will extinguish once the updated tire
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
5
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to
been established for the tire size equipped on your
receive this information.
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended damage may result when using replacement
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam-
and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a age. Do not use aftermarket sealants or balance
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire damage to the sensors may result.
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the “TPMS
(Continued)

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure correct tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve to trigger illumination of the “TPMS Warning Lamp.”
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
NOTE: and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care the tire.
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire Base System
failure or condition. The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
while adjusting your tire pressure. els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes Module.
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
stopping ability. the proper pressure.

The Basic TPMS consists of the following components: NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this
• Receiver Module
information.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
The “TPMS Warning Lamp” will flash on and off for
• TPMS Telltale Warning Light 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure
ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, pro-
Warnings
viding the system fault still exists. The “TPMS Warning
The “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will illu-
Lamp” will turn off when the fault condition no longer
minate in the instrument cluster, and an au-
exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following 5
dible chime will be activated when one or more
scenarios:
of the four active road tire pressures are low.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold sensors.
tire pressure value (located on the placard on the
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
driver’s-side B-Pillar). The system will automatically
that affects radio wave signals.
update and the “TPMS Warning Lamp” will extinguish
once the updated tire pressures have been received.

3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around 4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
the wheels or wheel housings. sound and the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will re-
main on solid.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
Vehicles with Compact Spare tire, the TPMS will automatically update, and the “TPMS
Telltale Warning Light” will turn off as long as no tire
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any
TPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the
of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
pressure in the compact spare tire.
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) for
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road the TPMS to receive this information.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
Premium System — If Equipped
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim-
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will turn
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
on.
els. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
3. After driving for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
(25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will flash Module.
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.

NOTE: It is particularly important to regularly check pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display a
and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires. Low Pressure message for three seconds and a graphic
display of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s)
The Premium TPMS consists of the following compo-
flashing.
nents:
• Receiver Module
• Four TPMS Sensors
• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel wells) 5
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and graph-
ics displaying tire pressures
• Yellow TPMS Telltale Warning Light
TPMS Low Pressure Warnings
Low Tire Pressure Display
The “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be acti-
vated when one or more of the four active road tire

Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value. The system will automatically update, the graphic
display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and
the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will extinguish once
the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Message
The “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will flash on and off Check TPM System Display
for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. The
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for
no longer exists, the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will
three seconds. This text message is then followed by a
no longer flash, the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message
graphic display, with - - in place of the pressure value(s)
indicating which TPMS Sensor(s) is not being received.

will not be present, and a pressure value will be dis- 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
played instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by any tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
of the following scenarios: limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “TPMS
Telltale Warning Light” will remain on, a chime will
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
sound, and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
value in the graphic display.
sensors.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light”
that affects radio wave signals.
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM 5
the wheels or wheel housings. SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will flash on
Vehicles with Compact Spare and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
TPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure
pressure value.
in the compact spare tire.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and • This device must accept any interference received,
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, including interference that may cause undesired
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the operation.
“TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will turn off and the
The tire pressure sensors are regulated under one of the
graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value
following licenses:
instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire pressure is below
the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the FUEL REQUIREMENTS
TPMS to receive this information. 3.3L and 3.8L Engine
General Information All engines are designed to meet all emis-
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and sions regulations and provide excellent
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the fuel economy and performance when us-
following conditions: ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
• This device may not cause harmful interference. of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.

4.0L Engine Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
The 4.0L engine is designed to meet all have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-
emissions regulations and provide satisfac- tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define
tory fuel economy and performance when fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,
using high-quality unleaded gasoline hav- engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The
ing an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu- manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet
facturer recommends the use of 89 octane the WWFC specifications if they are available.
for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline
Reformulated Gasoline
is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
over regular gasoline in these engines.
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. 5
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
prove air quality.
required.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline be-
fuel system components.
fore considering service for the vehicle.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen- ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
ates are required in some areas of the country during the content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
your vehicle.
• operate in a lean mode
CAUTION!
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
• poor engine performance
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical • poor cold start and cold drivability
fuel system components.
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the E-85 perform the following:
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
Methanol. • change the engine oil and oil filter

• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the It is even more important to look for gasolines without
engine controller memory MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
lated gasolines.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is Materials Added to Fuel
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without detergents or other additives are not needed under 5
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug normal conditions and would result in additional cost.
life and reduces emission system performance in some Therefore you should not have to add anything to the
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline fuel.
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT.

Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! • The use of fuel additives which are now being
sold as octane enhancers is not recommended.
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s Most of these products contain high concentra-
performance: tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. performance problems resulting from the use of
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor- such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
mance and damage the emission control system. the manufacturer.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune against you.
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)

Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
• To prevent carbon monoxide poisoning DO NOT mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monox- drive with all side windows fully open.
ide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill. • Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
• NEVER run the engine in a closed area, such as a to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
garage, and NEVER sit in a parked vehicle with exhaust gases from entering the vehicle. 5
the engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.3L ENGINES ONLY) — IF
running for more than a short period, adjust the EQUIPPED
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle. E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel Ve-
(Continued) hicles (FFV) only. These vehicles can be identified by the
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to

the other sections of this manual for information on
CAUTION!
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline only powered vehicles. Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
E-85 Fuel Cap
E-85 Badge

Ethanol Fuel (E-85) For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat-
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom-
15% unleaded gasoline. mended.
When you do switch fuel types, it is recommended that:
WARNING!
• you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok- • you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov- least 5 miles (8 km)
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard 5
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
use it near an open flame.
during warm up.
Fuel Requirements NOTE:
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on • Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85 non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels. hard starting and rough idle following start-up, even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).

• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully Starting
compatible with E–85 and may form deposits in your The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
Techron may be used. a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
E-85 and Gasoline Vehicles NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
FFV vehicles operated on E–85 require specially formu- beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Cruising Range
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
contains additional requirements, developed during ex-
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
by about 30% compared to gasoline operation.
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.

Replacement Parts ADDING FUEL
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
patible parts.
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION! NOTE: The driver’s side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
fuel door. 5
Maintenance
If you operate the vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow the
maintenance schedule section of this manual.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.

CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued)

• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
system could result from using an improper fuel in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap tions and will cause the MIL to turn on.
could let impurities into the fuel system and may • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
turn on, due to fuel vapors escaping from the could be burned. Always place gas containers on
system. the ground while filling.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
WARNING!
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the properly tightened.
tank filled.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
(Continued) come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel specified GVWR and GAWR.
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
Vehicle Certification Label
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
the driver’s door B-Pillar.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of The label contains the following information:
this manual. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking”
• Name of manufacturer
sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler
cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic • Month and year of manufacture 5
System — OBD II” in Section 7.
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
If the problem continues, the message will appear the
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) — Front
next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) — Rear
VEHICLE LOADING • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin- • Type of Vehicle
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar. • Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)

The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
WARNING!
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
it is important that you do not exceed the maximum
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) Tire Size
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
rear GAWR.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle, for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

Curb Weight Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight separately. It is important that you distribute the load
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full evenly over the front and rear axles.
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
GVWR.
added.
Loading
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty 5
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
and rear GAWR.
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
The best way to figure out the total weight of your have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
it is not over the GVWR. on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way
the brakes operate.

CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that

neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
LOADING TABLE — EXAMPLE ONLY
Front Axle Rear Axle
Empty Weight 2,140 lbs (971 kg) 1,470 lbs (667 kg)
Load (Driver, 360 lbs (163 kg) 980 lbs (445 kg)
passengers, and
cargo/luggage)

LOADING TABLE — EXAMPLE ONLY TRAILER TOWING

Front Axle Rear Axle In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
TOTAL 2,500 lbs 2,450 lbs
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
(1 134 kg) (1 111 kg)
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
GAWR 2,544 lbs 2,544 lbs
and safely as possible.
(1 154 kg) (1 154 kg)
A loaded vehicle is shown in the above table. Note that To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
exceeded. 5
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” at- Common Towing Definitions
tached to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s The following trailer towing-related definitions will as-
GVWR and GAWR’s. This table is only an example. sist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight. The total load must be limited so
that you do not exceed the GVWR.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
WARNING!
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem- It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a control of the vehicle and have an accident.
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale. Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10%
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider
and trailer when weighed in combination.
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
Frontal Area
allowance for the presence of a driver.
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) width of the front of a trailer.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
Trailer Sway Control
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
rear GAWR.

that typically provides adjustable friction associated with also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
swaying motions while traveling. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier tongue
Weight-Carrying Hitch
weights (TW), and may be required depending on vehicle
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
some other connecting point of the vehicle. This type of
hitch is the most popular on the market today and is
WARNING!
commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers.
• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
5
Weight-Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
performance, and could result in an accident.
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the • Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer’s axle(s). When compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it with an authorized hitch and trailer manufacturer
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent or a reputable authorized Recreational Vehicle
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing dealer for additional information.
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control

Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect) With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)

The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow, and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATIONS
Max. GTW
Class
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
5
Class IV - Extra Heavy 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Improper Adjustment of Duty
Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect) Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Your vehicle may be factory-equipped for safe towing of Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional drivetrain.
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See an authorized dealer for
package content.

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
GCWR (Gross
Max. GTW
Engine/Transaxle Combined Wt. Rat- Frontal Area Max. Tongue Wt.
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
ing)
Up to 2 persons & Luggage
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 22 sq ft (2.0 sq m) 180 lbs (82 kg)
1,800 lbs (816 kg)
3.3L, 3.8L and 3 to 5 persons & Luggage
4.0L/Automatic 1,350 lbs (612 kg)
6 to 7 persons & Luggage
1,000 lbs (454 kg)

GCWR (Gross
Max. GTW
Engine/Transaxle Combined Wt. Rat- Frontal Area Max. Tongue Wt.
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
ing)
Up to 2 persons & Luggage
3,800 lbs (1 723 kg)*
3.8L and 4.0L/
Automatic (with 9,000 lbs (4 082 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 335 lbs (152 kg)
3,350 lbs (1 519 kg)*
Tow Package)
3,000 lbs (1 360 kg)*
* For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 lbs (45 kg). 5
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to
Tire–Safety Information in this section of the manual.
Trailer and Trailer Tongue Weight rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-side,
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your many trailer accidents.
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the

Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight Consider the following items when computing the
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo/luggage or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard in the “Tire-Safety Information” section of this
manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.

Towing Requirements
WARNING!
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom- Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
mended: Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
CAUTION! • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles and will not shift during travel. When trailering
(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may dam- cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
age your vehicle. can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and 5
have an accident.
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
Schedule.” Refer to Section 8 of this manual. When towing cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings. age to brakes, axle, engine, transaxle, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Safety chains must always be used between your 3. GAWR
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to 4. Trailer tongue weight rating for that trailer hitch.
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. (This requirement may limit the ability to always
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and achieve the 10% to 15% range of trailer tongue weight
allow enough slack for turning corners. as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on Towing Requirements — Tires
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
spare tire.
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded. • Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four “Tires–General Information” in this section for proper
ratings are not exceeded: tire inflation procedures.
1. GVWR • Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
2. GTW sures before trailer usage.
(Continued)

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires–General Infor- a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
mation” in this section for the proper inspection brake controller is not required.
procedure.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires–General Informa- 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
tion” in this section for proper tire replacement proce- 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
dures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and CAUTION!
GAWR limits.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 5
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights and Wiring
WARNING!
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake motoring safety.
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin or a
brakes when you need them and could have an
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
accident.
harness and connector.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi- NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle wiring harness.
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
accident. but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following four-pin connector and seven-pin
connector illustrations.

5
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn 1 — Battery 5 — Ground
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn 2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes

Towing Tips 45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to the “Main-
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping tenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the proper mainte-
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy nance intervals.
traffic.
NOTE:
Automatic Transaxle • Check the automatic transaxle fluid level before tow-
The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing. However, ing.
if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, move the shift
• The six-speed automatic transaxle is sealed and re-
lever into third gear (with four-speed transaxle) or fifth
quires an authorized dealer to check the transaxle
gear (with six-speed transaxle).
fluid.
NOTE: Moving the shift lever into third gear (with
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
four-speed transaxle) or fifth gear (with six-speed trans-
axle) while operating the vehicle under heavy operating • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
conditions will improve performance and extend trans-
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
axle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
This action will also provide better engine braking.
you can get back to cruising speed.
The automatic transaxle fluid and filter should be
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
maximize fuel efficiency.

Cooling System RECREATIONAL TOWING
To reduce potential for engine and transaxle overheating, (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
take the following actions:
CAUTION!
• City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put the shift Towing this vehicle behind another vehicle (flat-
lever in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed. towing with all four wheels on the ground) is not
recommended.
• Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
• Air Conditioning wheels are off the ground. 5
Turn off temporarily.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 ▫ Wheel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 ▫ Secure The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 䡵 Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 6
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 ▫ Towing With The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . 405
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
center of the instrument panel above the radio. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — Slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
• In city traffic — While stopped, shift the transmission
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
shift lever into NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
an impending overheat condition:
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
other motorists. system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
though the ignition switch is OFF. heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
may wear down your battery.
from the engine cooling system.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage WARNING!
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
service.
center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
WARNING! tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the 6
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
slippery areas.
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the • If it is necessary to retrieve the spare tire from
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this under the vehicle on the side of the vehicle close to
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
System Pressure Cap paragraph. avoid the danger of being hit.

Jack Location Spare Tire Removal
The jack, jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located
behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area. under the center of the vehicle by means of a cable winch
Turn the two cover latches to release the cover. mechanism. The “spare tire drive” nut is located on the
floor, under a plastic cap at the front of the floor console.
NOTE: The base console, if equipped, must be removed
to raise and lower the spare tire. Refer to “Console
Features” in Section 3 for the console removal procedure.
The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be as-
sembled into a spare tire hook; to remove the compact
spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or a
Winch “T” Handle; to raise/lower the compact spare
tire/cover assembly.
Jack And Tool Location

Remove the pouch containing the scissors jack, jack
handle, and tools.

Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake. 6

Tools
3. Place the shift lever into PARK.
1A – Spare Tire Hook 2A – Winch “T” Handle
(Piece 1) (Piece 1) 4. Turn OFF the ignition.
1B – Spare Tire Hook 2B – Winch “T” Handle
(Piece 2) (Piece 2)
1C – Spare Tire Hook 2C – Winch “T” Handle
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
(Piece 3) (Piece 3)

6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
right front tire, block the left rear the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
wheel. the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
when the vehicle is being jacked. transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
Jacking Instructions
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
WARNING!
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to jack.
help prevent personal injury or damage to your • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
vehicle: • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
(Continued) for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)

2. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly,
assemble the winch handle extensions to form a “T’ and
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely fit the winch “T” handle over the drive nut. Rotate the
careful of motor traffic. nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops turning
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are freely. This will allow enough slack in the cable to allow
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the you to pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle.
valve stem facing the ground.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch “T” handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
6
3. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the

Jack Warning Label Spare Tire Hook and pull the compact spare tire/cover
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by assembly from under the vehicle.
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.

WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
NOTE: If either front tire is flat, it may be necessary to

jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/
cover assembly from under the vehicle. Refer to jack
engagement locations in the following steps for proper Spare Tire Hook And Removal
jack placement. 4. When the compact spare tire/cover assembly is clear
of the vehicle, stand the tire/cover assembly upright and
remove the wheel spacer by squeezing the two retainer
tabs together.

5. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill flange
of the vehicle body.
NOTE:
• Rear jack locations are between a pair of down-facing
tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle side body.
• Front jack locations are on the sill flange of the vehicle
side body, and align with front door edges.
6
Squeezing Winch Retainer Tabs

Jack Location

CAUTION! WARNING!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
locations other than those indicated in Step 5. the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
6. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the to remove the tire.
right until the jack head is properly engaged in the
described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are 8. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
sure the jack is securely engaged. covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the 9. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lug
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
6
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
provides maximum stability. lowered.
NOTE:
• Do not install the wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel
covers.

10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the 13. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tire
left. cover assembly. in the rear cargo area. Do not stow the
deflated tire in the spare tire location. Have the full-
11. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as possible.
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The 14. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in vehicle. Reassemble the winch handle extensions to form
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked a “T” and fit the winch “T” handle over the drive nut.
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a Rotate the nut to the right until the winch mechanism
service station. clicks at least three times.
12. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position. 15. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools.
16. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as
WARNING!
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as required.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.

Wheel Nuts turning freely. This will allow enough slack in the cable to
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally, to allow you to pull the wheel spacer out from under the
eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or vehicle.
the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles WARNING!
of operation, and after each time a tire is changed, to
A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly, thrown
allow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All nuts
forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger
should first be firmly seated against the wheel. The nuts
the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the com-
should then be tightened to recommended torque.
pact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place
Tighten the nuts to final torque in increments. Progress
provided.
around the bolt circle, tightening the nut opposite to the
nut just previously tightened until final torque is 6
achieved. Recommended torque is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). CAUTION!
Secure The Spare Tire The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a “T” winch “T” handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
and fit the winch “T” handle over the drive nut. Rotate power tools is not recommended and can damage the
the nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops winch.

2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the
WARNING!
spare tire hook, and pull the wheel spacer from under the
vehicle. Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer
have been properly extended through the center of
3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is
the wheel and spare tire/cover assembly. Failure to
down, and place the tire into the spare tire/cover assem-
properly engage both retainer tabs could result in
bly. Slide the wheel spacer through the center of the
loss of the spare tire and cover assembly, which will
wheel and spare tire/cover assembly, so that the two
cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of vehicle
retainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire cover on
control.
the opposite side.
4. Using the winch “T” handle, rotate the drive nut to the
CAUTION!
right until the compact spare tire/cover assembly is
The compact spare tire/cover assembly must be used drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
when the compact spare tire is stored. Failure to use
5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear
this cover could drastically reduce the life of the
the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be
compact spare tire.
overtightened. Check under the vehicle to ensure the
compact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned cor-
rectly against the underside of the vehicle.

CAUTION! WARNING!
The winch mechanism is designed specifically to • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
stow a compact spare tire only. Do not attempt to use ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
the winch to stow the full size flat tire, or any other ignition switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
full-size tire. Vehicle damage may result. • Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE contact. You could be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution that can
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis- cause serious burns; do not allow battery fluid to
sion cannot be started this way. Also, there is a greater contact eyes, skin or clothing. Wear safety glasses
risk of an accident when a vehicle is being pushed or and protect your eyes at all times. If acid splashes 6
towed. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area imme-
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster diately with large quantities of water.
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start (Continued)
can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this
procedure carefully.

the automatic transmission shift lever into PARK and
turn the ignition switch to the OFF position for both
• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam- vehicles.
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes. Do not lean over battery when WARNING!
attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each
other. Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
• Do not use a booster battery or any other booster could establish a ground connection and personal
source that has a greater than 12 Volt system, i.e., injury could result.
do not use a 24 Volt power source.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
When jump-starting, proceed as follows: loads.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry, 4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
such as watch bands or bracelets, that might make an terminal of the discharged battery. Connect the other end
inadvertent electrical contact. of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster
battery.
2. When a boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach and
do not let the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, place

5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal 6. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
of the booster battery, and then to the engine of the battery. Let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure there is a engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
good contact on the engine.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the WARNING!
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
Any procedure other than the jump-starting process
could cause the battery to explode and could result
listed could result in:
in personal injury.
• Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
• During cold weather when temperatures are be- 6
the battery vent.
low the freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
• Personal injury or property damage due to battery
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting
explosion.
because the battery could rupture or explode and
cause personal injury. Battery temperature must be
brought above freezing point before attempting a
jump-start.

CAUTION! CAUTION!
Any procedure other than above could result in • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle tween 1st and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels
or of the immobilized vehicle. faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).
front wheels. Then move the shift lever back and forth
between REVERSE and DRIVE. Using minimal accelera- NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when starting
tor pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, with- off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to
out spinning the wheels, is most effective. switch the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) to “Partial
Off” mode. For further information on ESC refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in Section 5.

• The towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72 km/h).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener- CAUTION!
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmis-
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
sion gear failure.
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
If the transmission is inoperative, or if the vehicle is to be
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
towed more than 100 miles (160 km), the vehicle must be
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
towed with the front wheels off the ground.
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 6
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
Towing With The Ignition Key with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi- front fascia will result.
tions: • Always use wheel lift equipment when towing
• The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL. from the front. The only other approved method of
towing is with a flatbed truck.
• The distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 miles
(160 km). (Continued)

Towing Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to with the ignition in the OFF position. The only approved
the rear sheet metal, liftgate and fascia will occur. method of towing without the ignition key is with a
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans- prevent damage to the vehicle.
mission may result.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
ignition switch must be in the ON position, not in Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
the LOCK or ACC positions. Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, is only permitted within the limitations
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed described in this section.
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the trans- A Tow Dolly
mission remains in NEUTRAL. The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow a
front wheel drive vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage
may occur.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.3/3.8L . . . . . . . . . . 409 䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
䡵 Engine Compartment — 4.0L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 411 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 411 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 7
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 ▫ Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 ▫ Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From ▫ Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker
▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders . . 442 And Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 ▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) . . . 443
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 457
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.3/3.8L
7
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Engine Oil Fill
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (3.3L Only) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Battery 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Totally Integrated Power Module 11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 4.0L
1 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick

2 — Air Cleaner Filter 8 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Battery 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Totally Integrated Power Module
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic further damage to the emission control system. It
transmission control systems. When these systems are could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- tests can be performed.
sions well within current government regulations. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a 7
soon as possible. “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of

this manual. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when
is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
tightened. ready for testing.
Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
If the problem persists, the message will appear the next system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
MIL light off.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
PROGRAMS check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. 1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- crank or start the engine.
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.

4. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON you may need to do nothing more than drive your
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
a normal bulb check. system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen: Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
running.
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully REPLACEMENT PARTS
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
7
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,

DEALER SERVICE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person- The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service services determined by the engineers who designed your
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are vehicle.
available which include detailed service information for
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
any procedure yourself.
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil CAUTION!
penalties being assessed against you.
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
WARNING! form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
You can be badly injured working on or around a components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a dealership or qualified repair center.
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me- (Continued)
chanic.

Engine Oil
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids Checking Oil Level
that protect the performance and durability of To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
components as the chemicals can damage your check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi- fully warmed engine is shut OFF or before starting the
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New engine after it has sat overnight.
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
because of component malfunction, use only the improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
specified fluid for the flushing procedure. the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these 7
engines.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
CAUTION!
Identification Symbol
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or This symbol means that the oil has
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
Change Engine Oil manufacturer only recommends
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is API Certified engine oils.
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
information on this system.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
CAUTION!
whichever occurs first. Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
Engine Oil Selection chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
For best performance and maximum protection under all not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.3L & 3.8L For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to
Gasoline Engines “Engine Compartment” in this section.
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifica-
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number,
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
should not be used.
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your vehicle. Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
“Engine Compartment” in this section.
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifica- are followed.
tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number,
Materials Added to Engine Oil
should not be used.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 4.0L Gasoline tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
7
Engines the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for all operating performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
temperatures. Your engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.

Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, proper maintenance intervals.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service WARNING!
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
your area.
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
Engine Oil Filter cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
oil change. near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
Engine Oil Filter Selection
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
serious personal injury.
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air cleaner WARNING!
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
Exhaust System monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
system. to “Exhaust Gas” in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is CAUTION!
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- 7
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure against you.
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage. WARNING!
CAUTION! A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv- where your exhaust system can contact anything that
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor- can burn.
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle. vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut OFF and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
WARNING!
• Do not shut OFF the engine or interrupt the ignition
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
motion.
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Do not lean
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
vehicle. splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions. a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Do not allow cable
Maintenance-Free Battery clamps to touch each other.
The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently • Battery posts, terminals and related accessories 7
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
maintenance required. after handling.

Air Conditioner Maintenance
CAUTION!
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
battery that the positive cable is attached to the at the start of each warm season. This service should
positive post and the negative cable is attached to include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi- performance check. Drive belt tension should also be
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the checked at this time.
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion. CAUTION!
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
WARNING!
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi- Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other service be performed by an authorized dealer, or other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause authorized service facility, using recovery and recycling
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to equipment.
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book, lo-
NOTE: Use only manufacturer-approved A/C System
cated on the DVD, for further warranty informa-
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
tion.
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the 7
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected proper maintenance intervals.
should be done by an experienced repairman.

WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to re-
place the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter the housing.
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.

hood latching components to ensure proper function.
CAUTION!
When performing other underhood services, the hood
The A/C air filter is labeled with an arrow to indicate latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
airflow direction through the filter. Failure to prop- cleaned and lubricated.
erly install the filter will result in the need to replace
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
it more often.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
Body Lubrication lock cylinder.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
Windshield Wiper Blades
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
cated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula- 7
tions of salt or road film.
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
removed. Particular attention should also be given to from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
WARNING!
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor Commercially available windshield washer solvents
performance of blades may be present with chattering, are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is must be exercised when filling or working around
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid the washer solution.
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
function. After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
Adding Washer Fluid
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. MOPAR威 All
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine
with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning
compartment and should be checked at regular intervals.
action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging,
Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
and is not harmful to paint or trim.
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
seconds to flush out any residual water.

Cooling System rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of
WARNING! the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
controlled and can start at anytime the ignition ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
switch is in the ON position. at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine leaks.
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
you see or hear steam coming from under the not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. 7
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
Coolant Checks bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or

Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
CAUTION!
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. engine damage and may decrease corrosion pro-
tection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze)
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the is introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
proper maintenance intervals. gency, it should be replaced with the specified
Selection of Coolant engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool- • Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type. tional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

Adding Coolant Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze)
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before system.
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using
the vehicle is operated.
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze). NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze), a minimum
will require more frequent coolant changes.
solution of 50% recommended MOPAR威 Antifreeze/
Coolant Five Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Cooling System Pressure Cap
7
Organic Additive Technology), or equivalent, in water The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of
should be used. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C ) are antici- coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the
pated. coolant recovery bottle.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal of Used Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
WARNING! with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
any ground spills immediately.
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the Coolant Level
pressure cap while the system is hot or under The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
pressure. determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one engine cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en- the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges
gine damage may result. indicated on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing the safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service atten-
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
dant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature
• Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in
is satisfactory, the coolant bottle only needs to be checked
once a month. the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If
engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
against freezing.
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
Points to Remember
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor system should be pressure tested for leaks.
7
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
WARNING!
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
equipped with air conditioning, also keep the front of
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
the condenser clean.
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter possible brake damage. You would not have your full
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install braking capacity in an emergency.
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
mileage, and increased emissions. The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
Brakes
the “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system failure.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
proper maintenance intervals. “FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.

Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
leak and a checkup may be needed. has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re- Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
section for the correct fluid type. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
WARNING! failure. This could result in a accident.
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also 7
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
damage your brake system and/or impair its per- taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
formance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also labeled on the original factory (Continued)
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)

All six–speed transaxles are equipped with a capped
dipstick tube. It is sealed and should not be tampered
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami- with. Your authorized dealer has the necessary tools to
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could ensure that the fluid level is set properly.
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident. Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
Automatic Transaxle transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance. Use
The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
contained within a single housing. fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts” in
this section for the correct fluid type. It is important that
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the should be used in any transaxle; only the approved
transaxle and the fluid. lubricant may be used.
All four–speed transaxles are equipped with a conven-
tional filler tube and dipstick. If fluid is added, it should
be added through the filler tube.

Fluid Level Check — 3.3L Engine with Four-Speed
CAUTION!
Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac- The dipstick is located just behind the radiator on the
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration lower right side.
in transaxle shift quality and/or torque converter
To properly check the automatic transaxle fluid level, the
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
following procedure must be used:
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to 1. The vehicle must be on level ground.
“Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts” in this sec-
2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a
tion for the correct fluid type.
minimum of 60 seconds.
Fluid Level Check — 3.8L and 4.0L Engines with 3. Fully apply the parking brake.
Six-Speed Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi-
The six-speed automatic transaxle is a sealed unit and has
tion, ending with the shift lever in PARK. Wipe the area
7
no dipstick. See your authorized dealer to have the
around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of
transaxle fluid checked or serviced.
dirt entering the transaxle.

5. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
CAUTION!
or warm. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82°C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transaxle can
been driven at least 15 miles (24 km). The fluid cannot be cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from
comfortably held between the fingertips. Cold is when entering the transaxle after checking or replenishing
the fluid is below 80°F (27°C). fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is reseated
properly.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated.
Remove the dipstick and note reading.
Fluid and Filter Changes
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper proper maintenance intervals.
two holes in the dipstick).
If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason, the fluid
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between and filter should be changed.
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD”.
Special Additives
If the fluid level indicates that it is low, add sufficient Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
fluid to bring it to the proper level. product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transaxle. The only exception to this policy is

the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
addition, avoid using transaxle sealers as they may hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
adversely affect seals. have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
CAUTION!
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo- resistance built into your vehicle.
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
What Causes Corrosion?
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo- • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation 7
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
• Stone and gravel impact
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly • Insects, tree sap and tar
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, • Salt in the air near seacoast localities
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants

Washing
CAUTION!
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equiva-
as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch
lent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
metal and painted surfaces.
completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 a month.
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
of the doors and rocker panels be kept clear and open.
scratch the paint.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
considered the responsibility of the owner.
finish.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective

coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos- non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon- a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or
sibility of the owner. equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
finish.
packaged and sealed.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
Equipped
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on ner:
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
with a clean, dry towel.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
7
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with • For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威 cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive, remove soap residue.

• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Cleaner or a equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean, Armorall. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to
damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp clean vinyl upholstery
towel to remove soap residue.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
protectants on Stain Repel products. mended for leather upholstery.
Interior Care Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
Instrument Panel Surfaces
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
use protectants or other products which may cause
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
restore the low glare surface.
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
Cleaning Interior Trim solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equiva- tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
lent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent

Glass Surfaces
WARNING!
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or equivalent or any com-
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in mercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abra-
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. sive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside
rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the
Cleaning Headlights right rear quarter window equipped with the radio
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lightweight antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass head- that may scratch the elements.
lights.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. directly on the mirror.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses 7
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
lowed by rinsing. must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be Cleaning the Instrument Panel Cupholders
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
Removal
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting
rag.
at one edge to ease removal.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Cleaning
Seat Belt Maintenance The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow
Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical the cleaning procedure below.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for
If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull the
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to liner from the water and dip it back into the water about
wash them. six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse
the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn, or if
the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces
the buckles do not work properly.
with a clean soft cloth.

Installation
CAUTION!
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the
liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the • When installing the Totally Integrated Power
corresponding openings in the drawer. Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
FUSES do so may allow water to get into the Integrated
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical
The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is located system failure.
in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
applicable “Engine Compartment” illustration in this use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
section. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini- The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
fuses. A label that identifies each component may be may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
printed or embossed on the inside of the cover. load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be 7
corrected.

The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the FUSES/TIPM
following table. Cav- Cartridge
Mini-Fuse Description
FUSES/TIPM ity Fuse
Cav- Cartridge J7 30 Amp — Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
Mini-Fuse Description
ity Fuse Pink tem (ABS) Valve/ESP
J1 40 Amp — Power Folding Seat J8 40 Amp — Power Memory Seat
Green Green (If Equipped)
J2 30 Amp — Power Liftgate J9 40 Amp — PZEV Motor/Flex
Pink Module Green Fuel
J3 30 Amp — Rear Door J10 30 Amp — Headlamp Wash
Pink Module Pink Relay/Manifold
(RR Door Node) Tuning Valve
J4 25 Amp — Driver Door Node J11 30 Amp — Power Sliding Door
Natural Pink Module/Thatchum
J5 25 Amp — Passenger Door Node Relay Lock Feed
Natural J13 60 Amp — Ignition Off Draw
J6 40 Amp — Anti-Lock Brake Yellow (IOD) — Main
Green System (ABS) Pump/ J14 40 Amp — Rear Window
ESP Green Defogger

FUSES/TIPM FUSES/TIPM
Cav- Cartridge Cav- Cartridge
Mini-Fuse Description Mini-Fuse Description
ity Fuse ity Fuse
J15 30 Amp — Rear Blower M1 — 15 Amp Center High
Pink Blue Mounted Stop Light
J17 40 Amp — Starter Solenoid (CHMSL)/Brake
Green Switch
J18 20 Amp — Powertrain M2 — — —
Blue Control Module M3 — 20 Amp Spare Fuse
(PCM) Trans Range Yellow
J19 60 Amp — Radiator Fan M4 — 10 Amp Trailer Tow
Yellow Red
J20 30 Amp — Front Wiper LO/HI M5 — 25 Amp Inverter
Pink Natural
7
J21 20 Amp — Front/Rear Washer M6 — 20 Amp Power Outlet #1
Blue Yellow (ACC), Rain Sensor
J22 25 Amp — Sunroof Module
Natural

ity Fuse ity Fuse
M7 — 20 Amp Power Outlet #2 M10 — 15 Amp Ignition Off Draw —
Yellow (BATT/ACC SE- Blue Vehicle Entertainment
LECT) System
M8 — 20 Amp Front Heated Seat (IOD-VES),
Yellow (If Equipped) Satellite Digital Au-
M9 — 20 Amp Rear Heated Seat dio Receiver
Yellow (If Equipped) (SDARS), DVD,
Hands-Free Module
(HFM), Universal
Garage Door Opener
(UGDO), Vanity
Lamp (VANITY LP),
Streaming Video
Module
M11 — 10 Amp (Ignition Off Draw)
Red IOD-HVAC/ATC

ity Fuse ity Fuse
M12 — 30 Amp Amplifier (AMP)/ M15 — 20 Amp Rear View Mirror
Green Radio Yellow (RR VW MIR), Cabin
M13 — 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw— Compartment Node
Yellow Cabin Compartment (CCN), Multi-
Node (IOD-CCN), Function Control
SIREN, Clock Mod- Switch (MULTIFTCN
ule (CLK MOD), SW), Tire Pressure
Multi-Function Con- Monitor (TPM), Glow
trol Switch (MULTI- Plug Module (GLW
FCTN SW)/ITM PLG MOD) — Export
M14 — 20 Amp Spare Fuse Diesel Only, Assy- 7
Yellow Shifter (Hall Effect),
Acoustic Noise
Cancellation (ANC)

ity Fuse ity Fuse
M16 — 10 Amp Occupant Restraint M20 — 15 Amp Cabin Compartment
Red Controller/Occupant Blue Node Interior Light
Classification Module (CCN INT LIGHT),
(ORC/OCM) Switch Bank (SW
M17 — 15 Amp Left Tail/License/ BANK), Steering
Blue Park Lamp Control Module
(LT-TAIL/LIC/PRK (SCM), Switch
LMP), Running Steering Wheel
Lamps M21 — 20 Amp Auto Shut Down
M18 — 15 Amp Right Tail/Park/Run Yellow (ASD #3)
Blue Lamp (RT-TAIL/ M22 — 10 Amp Right Horn (RT
PRK/RUN LMP) Red HORN (HI/LOW)
M19 — 25 Amp Auto Shut Down M23 — 10 Amp Left Horn (LT HORN
Natural (ASD #1 and #2) Red (HI/LOW)
M24 — 25 Amp Rear Wiper
Natural (REAR WIPER)

ity Fuse ity Fuse
M25 — 20 Amp Fuel Pump (FUEL M28 — 10 Amp Next Generation
Yellow PUMP), Diesel Lift Red Controller (NGC),
Pump (DSL LIFT PCM, Transmission
PUMP) — Export Feed (TRANS FEED),
Only TCM
M26 — 10 Amp Power Mirror Switch M29 — 10 Amp Occupant Classifica-
Red (PWR MIRR SW), Red tion Module (OCM)
Driver Window M30 — 15 Amp Rear Wiper Module
Switch (DRVR WIND Blue (RR WIPER MOD),
SW) Power Folding Mir-
M27 — 10 Amp Ignition Switch (IGN ror (PWR FOLD 7
Red SW), Window Mod- MIR), J1962 Diagnos-
ule (WIN MOD), tic Feed
PEM, Steering M31 — 20 Amp Back-Up Lamps
Column Lock Yellow (B/U LAMPS)

ity Fuse ity Fuse
M32 — 10 Amp Occupant Restraint M34 — 10 Amp Park Assist (PRK
Red Controller (ORC), TT Red ASST), Heater Venti-
EUROPE lation, Air Condition-
M33 — 10 Amp Next Generation ing Module (HVAC
Red Controller (NGC), MOD), Headlamp
Global Powertrain Wash (HDLP WASH),
Engine Controller Compass (COMPAS),
(GPEC), TCM IR Sensor, Rear Cam-
era, Lamp Door FT
Drv/Pass, Lamp
Flashlight, AHLM,
Relay Diesel Cabin
Heater, Rad Fan
Diesel
M35 — 10 Amp Heated Mirrors
Red

FUSES/TIPM are fused with self-resetting fuses that are only service-
Cav- Cartridge able by an authorized dealer. The power seats are fused
Mini-Fuse Description by a 30 Amp circuit breaker located under the driver’s
ity Fuse
seat. The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit
M36 — 20 Amp Power Outlet #3
Yellow (BATT) breaker located under the instrument panel near the
steering column. If you experience temporary or perma-
M37 — 10 Amp Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
Red tem (ABS), Electronic nent loss of these systems, see your authorized dealer for
Stability Program service.
(ESP), Stop Lamp
Switch (STP LP SW), VEHICLE STORAGE
Fuel Pump Rly Hi If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
Control 21 days, you may want to take steps to protect your
M38 — 25 Amp Door Lock/Unlock battery. You may do the following:
Natural Motors (LOCK/ • Remove the 20 Amp mini-fuse in the Totally Inte- 7
UNLOCK MTRS), grated Power Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off
Liftgate Lock/Unlock Draw (IOD).
Motors
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
The heated mirrors, lower instrument panel power outlet
and removable floor console, when in the front position

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
service for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning for replacement instructions.
system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-
and should not be used for replacement.
pressor damage when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb Number

Backup, Tail, Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb Number Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp . . . LED (See Note 1)
Center & Rear Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Fog Lamp — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
Center & Rear Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Front Side Marker, Park/
Front Door Courtesy Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Turn Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P27 / 7W or 3157
Front Header Reading Lamps — If Equipped. . . . . 578 Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
Instrument Cluster Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC74 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Liftgate Lamp(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Note 1: The Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Overhead Console Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . PC579 uses LED lights that are not serviceable separately. The
Removable Console Lamp — If Equipped . . . . . . . 194 CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly see your
Visor Vanity Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6501966 authorized dealer.

BULB REPLACEMENT 5. Connect the wiring connector to bulb and slide red
lock tab forward.
Headlamps
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
housing. 1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
housing.
2. Slide the red lock tab rearward on the connector, then
depress the tab and remove the connector from the bulb. 2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the
headlamp housing, then pull the bulb out.
3. Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the
headlamp housing. 3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp housing.
4. Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until locked
into the headlamp housing. Fog Lamps
CAUTION!
NOTE: Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of the 7
fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia, remove the push
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil pin and lower the hinged access door on the air dam.
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the access panel on
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
the air dam, twist the bulb counterclockwise, and remove
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
bulb.

CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
2. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.

3. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
reinstall the bulb by twisting clockwise.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker and
Backup Lamps Removing Tail Lamp Assembly
NOTE:
1. Raise the liftgate.
• If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is
2. Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the two placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
screws from the inboard side. Use a fiber stick or similar scratch the paint.
tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side to
• The PRY location is best closest to the studs while
disengage the two ball studs.
dislodging them separately.

Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly.
See your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
The license plate lamp is located under the tailgate light
bar and above the license plate.
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
tab on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and pull
down on the lamp assembly for removal.
1 — Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Bulb Combo 2 — Backup Bulb

2. Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assembly
and pull the bulb out to remove.
3. Twist the socket and remove from the lamp assembly. 7
3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the socket into the
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket. lamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into place
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the ensuring the locking tab is secure.
lamp assembly.

FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 20 Gallons 76 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.3L and 3.8L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
4.0L Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System *
3.3L, 3.8L, and 4.0L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/ 13.4 Quarts 12.6 Liters
Antifreeze 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Qts (2.8 L) if equipped with a rear
heater.

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant Five Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT
Engine Coolant
(Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements
Engine Oil (3.3L and 3.8L Engines) of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements
Engine Oil (4.0L Engine) of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs (3.3L and 3.8L Engines) RE14PLP5 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm]) 7
Spark Plugs (4.0L Engine) ZFR5LP-13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Fuel Selection (3.3L and 3.8L Engines) 87 Octane
Fuel Selection (4.0L Engine) 87 Octane Acceptable — 89 Recommended

Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transaxle MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If
Brake Master Cylinder DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use
only recommended brake fluids.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Trans-
Power Steering Reservoir
mission Fluid or equivalent.

M
A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES I
N
T
E
N
CONTENTS A
N
C
䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 460 E
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 S

C
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 462 H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8

M 460 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
N The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
T must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
E
N the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, CHAngE OIL will
A system. These and all other maintenance services in-
N flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single
cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best
C chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is neces-
E vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
sary.
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
S conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
C
H driving. equipped vehicles, Oil Change Required will be dis-
E played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
D Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
U malfunction is suspected.
L Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
E NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-
S indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
8 vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
individual using any automotive part that has been
(805 km).
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 461 M
A
NOTE: Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator I
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor themessage after completing the scheduled oil change. If this N
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’sscheduled oil change is performed by someone other T
E
than your dealer, the message can be reset by referring to
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change, N
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT the steps described under “Oil Change Required” in “Use A
illuminated. Factory Settings” of the EVIC section in this manual or N
C
under “Odometer/Trip Odometer” in the “Instrument E
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
Cluster Descriptions section of this manual.
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time. S
At Each Stop For Fuel C
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals H
exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, which- • Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a E
ever comes first. fully warmed engine is shut OFF. Checking the oil D
U
level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve L
the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only E
when the level is at or below the ADD, SAFE or MIN S
mark. 8
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.

A
I Once A Month At Each Oil Change
N
T • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Change the engine oil filter.
E damage.
N • Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
A • Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
N as required. CAUTION!
C
E • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, the Failure to perform the required maintenance items
S brake master cylinder, the power steering and the may result in damage to the vehicle.
C transaxle and add as needed.
H Required Maintenance Intervals
E • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
D Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
operation.
U pages for the required maintenance intervals.
L
E
S
8

A
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or 12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service I
N
6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule T
Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. E
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires. N
filter. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the A
❏ Rotate tires. engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. N
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter. C
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. E
❏ Inspect the CV Joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
S
12 months.
C
❏ Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or H
12 months. E
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for D
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date
8
Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

A
I 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or 24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
N
T 18 Months Maintenance Schedule
E Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.
A filter. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
N ❏ Rotate tires. engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
C ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
E ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV Joints.
S
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
C
H ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
E damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
D
U
L
E
S
8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

A
N
30 Months Maintenance Schedule T
Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. E
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter. C
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
S
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8

A
N
S
C
D
U
L
E
S

A
N
filter. ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. A
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter. N
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. C
❏ Change the automatic transaxle fluid & filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: E
police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.
S
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles
C
(170 000 km). H
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for E
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. D
U
L
E
S
8

A
N
S
C
D
U
L
E
S

A
N
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8

A
N
C ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if
necessary.† ❏ Inspect the CV Joints.
S
C
D
U
L
E
S

A
N
❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.3L and ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter. C
3.8L engines).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.3L, 3.8L, ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
S
and 4.0L engines). damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
C
❏ Replace the timing belt (4.0L engine). H
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if E
not done at 60 months. D
U
L
E
S
8

A
N
A filter. ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
C ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
E ❏ Inspect the CV Joints.
S
C
H damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
E ❏ Replace accessory drive belt(s).
D ❏ Change the automatic transaxle fluid & filter.
U
L
E
S

A
N
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8

A
I 138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or 138 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8 Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

A
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service 150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or I
N
Schedule 150 Months Maintenance T
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Service Schedule E
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil N
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the filter. A
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. ❏ Rotate tires. N
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter. ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. C
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8

A
I † This maintenance is recommended by the manufac-
N turer, but is not required to maintain emissions warranty.
T
E
N WARNING!
A
N • You can be badly injured working on or around a
C motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
E have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
S you have any doubt about your ability to perform
C a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
H mechanic.
E
D • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
U vehicle could result in a component malfunction
L
E and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
S could cause an accident
8

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 479 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . 482
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 480 ▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 480
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
9
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

478 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 479
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
YOUR VEHICLE At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know. facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
Be Reasonable With Requests the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
9
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with

This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
solved with this process. Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
ship. They want to know if you need assistance. P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
Phone: (800) 465–2001
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center. In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
Impaired (TDD/TTY) manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer have any questions about the service contract, call the
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter line at 1-800-521-9922.
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
Service Contract contract documents, and contact the person listed in
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle those documents.
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected 9
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only

We appreciate that you have made a major investment WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle.
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related MOPAR姞 PARTS
concerns. MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
WARNING! mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
individual problems between you, your authorized defect to the Canadian government should write to:
dealer, and the manufacturer. Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
3V9.
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., To order the following manuals, you may use either the
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
http://www.safercar.gov. cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9

• Service Manuals • Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor- These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need assistance of service and engineering specialists to
in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, main- acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
taining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward capabilities and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Call toll free at:
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians Or
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by- • www.techauthority.com
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
TIRE QUALITY GRADES habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
The following tire grading categories were established by teristics and climate.
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
Traction Grades
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
your vehicle.
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
requirements in addition to these grades. concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart 9

Temperature Grades
WARNING!
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and heat buildup and possible tire failure.
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.

INDEX
10

488 INDEX
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 429 Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,70,72,73
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 67,70,73
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 418 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 428,429,456
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,423 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290,298 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,293,422 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control . . . . . . . . 289 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,184
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,73 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32,33
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,71,76,96,226 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 293

INDEX 489
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434,458 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434,436 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435,436 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434,458 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 94
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,452
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 26 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232,239
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
10

490 INDEX
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Caps, Filler Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,83,84
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95,361 Cleaning
Cargo Compartment Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,247,251,260
Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,361 Coat Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108,284 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229,232,238
Check Engine Light Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232,239
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223,412 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231,239

INDEX 491
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Connector Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 428,456,457
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 270 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,442
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Console, Removable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 429 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,287,296
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Dipsticks
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427,430 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
10

492 INDEX
Disposal Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 159
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Domelight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,233
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Emergency, In Case of
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389,392
Driving Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Through Flowing, Rising, Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 412,460
or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409,410
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . 281 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409,410
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,95,361

INDEX 493
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356,456 Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,456,457 Filters
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,423
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418,457
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416,456 Flashers
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,217,453,454
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 73 Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,95,361,419 Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95,419 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Express Down Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,363
Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
10

494 INDEX
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216,365
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Fluid Level Checks Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356,456
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 457 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152,226,453
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) Seating . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 365,367,411
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

INDEX 495
Gauges Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16,26,356 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,372 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,371 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Hands-Free Phone (uconnect威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 154
Hazard Hitches
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 176
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Hook, Coat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
10

496 INDEX
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,13
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,83 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214,216 Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 LATCH
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . 87
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148,149 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

INDEX 497
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,148 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,71,76,96,226 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148,149
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 223
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452,453 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,453
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152,226,453 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452,453
10

498 INDEX
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 223 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,453,454 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 223,412
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 216 Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198,367,369 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107,142
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229,237
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Locks Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

INDEX 499
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,482 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416,456
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Navigation System (uconnect威 gps) . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,456
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411,412
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,70,74 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 66,67,70,73 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,105
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222,229,236 Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . 173
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . 222,229,236 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216,388
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,457 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,483
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418,457 Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
10

500 INDEX
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Pretensioners
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 334 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Power Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . 427,429
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Radio, Satellite (uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . 276,280
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 185 Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290,298
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319,320 Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Windows, Express Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385,406

INDEX 501
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,63
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,95
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 282 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Removable Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Satellite Radio (uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . 276,280
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,63
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . 222,229,236 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,96
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 56
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,86
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,84
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
10

502 INDEX
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Service Engine Soon Light
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,247,251,260
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,153,217,453,454
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Sirius Backseat TV™ (uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . 280
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 428,457 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,390
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

INDEX 503
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 293
Steering Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 216,389
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319,320 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 334
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191,451 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301,451 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,338,485
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 64 Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
10

504 INDEX
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389,392 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385,406
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330,338 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434,458

INDEX 505
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434,458
Transmitter Battery Service Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231,239
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 176 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 19 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,367,369
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301,451
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Video Entertainment System™
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153,217,453,454 (Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
uconnect威 (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Warning Lights
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 270 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
10

506 INDEX
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Rear Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Water Windows, Express Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,426
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,184 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Zone Control (Temperature Control) . . . . . . . . . . 289

Grand Caravan 2010

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Grand Caravan 2010

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Grand Caravan 2010

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Key Fob With Three-Button RKE Transmitter

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Sliding Door Lock

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Power Door Locks — If Equipped Driver Power Door Lock Switches

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Power Vent Window Switches Driver’s Power Window Switches

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Power Window Lockout Switch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Front Passenger Power Window Switches

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

LIFTGATE Liftgate Handle Location

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS • Supplemental Side Seat Airbags — if equipped

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine